JP2018038855A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To dynamically light up a setting value display part and a game information display part.SOLUTION: A display part includes a first display part (digit 5) for displaying a setting value and a second display part (digits 1 and 2) for displaying the number of stored tokens, and then an LED display request flag for determining the display part that can be lit. During a setting change, a value of the LED display request flag is determined such that the first display part is lit and the second display part is extinguished ("00011100"). After the setting change, the value of the LED display request flag is updated such that the first display part is extinguished and the second display part is lit ("00001111"). An LED display request counter is included to determine the display part that is updated in each interruption processing and is lit in current interruption processing. On condition of those determined for the display part that can be lit by the LED display request flag and is lit by current interruption processing by the LED display request counter, the display part is lit.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine including a first display unit that displays a set value and a second display unit that displays information related to a game.

Conventionally, a gaming machine, such as a slot machine, is provided with a display unit for displaying the number of medals and a display unit for displaying set values. For example, a seven segment display (so-called 7-segment) is used as the display unit.
Here, a payout number display 50 for displaying the number of payouts and a set value display 60 for displaying set values of the slot machine are provided. A method of selectively lighting one of the value indicators 60 is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-6-304295

  In the technique of Patent Document 1, the display device to be lit can be switched by turning on / off the changeover switch 100 (setting key switch). However, since it is manually operated, a plurality of 7-segment dynamic lighting control by automatic control is performed. is not. Further, in the payout number display 50, the tenth display 51 is always lit, so even if the first display 52 and the set value display 60 are switched on by the changeover switch 100, the entire display is displayed. It will not light up dynamically.

  The problem to be solved by the present invention is to enable dynamic lighting in a gaming machine such as a slot machine when it has a display unit that displays a set value and a display unit that displays information about a game. .

The present invention solves the above problems by the following means. The configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses.
The present invention
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
A display unit (digits 1 to 5) controlled by the main control means,
The main control means determines means (setting key switch 52, setting change / reset switch 53) from among a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) having different advantages to the player. , Setting value display LED 63, setting changing means 62a, setting change processing program (M_RANK_SET)),
The display unit includes a first display unit (set value display LED 63) for displaying the set value, and a second display unit (reserved number display LED 71, acquired number display LED 72) for displaying information on the game,
Provided with a display request flag (LED display request flag) that defines the display unit that can be turned on,
The main control means includes
While the set value is being changed, the value of the display request flag is determined so that the first display unit is turned on and at least one second display unit (storage number display LED 71) is turned off ("00011100"). ),
After the change of the set value, the display request flag is set so that the first display unit is turned off and the second display unit (stored number display LED 71) turned off during the change of the set value is turned on. Update the value (update to "00001111")
A display request counter (LED display request counter) is provided for each interrupt process, and determines the display unit to be lit in the current interrupt process.
The display unit is lit on the condition that the display unit can be turned on by the display request flag and the display request counter determines that the display unit is turned on in the current interruption process.

  According to the present invention, the first display unit that displays the set value and the second display unit that displays information related to the game can be dynamically lit using the period of the interrupt process.

It is an external perspective view showing a slot machine (game machine) of the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view of the front cover of the slot machine as viewed from the inner surface side (seen from the player side) in FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the inside of the base body viewed from the player side with the front cover opened in FIG. 1. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of control of the slot machine in this embodiment. It is a top view which shows the storage number display LED, the acquisition number display LED, and the status display LED in more detail. It is a circuit diagram which shows the wiring of the electric signal of a main control board, a display board, and the digit 5. FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows a display board | substrate and the wiring of the electrical signal of digits 1-4. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the digits 1-5 and the segments AP. It is a figure which shows a LED display request flag and a LED display request counter. It is a figure which shows a LED segment table. It is a figure which shows the input ports 0-2 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the output ports 0-3 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the output ports 4-6 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a figure which shows the display window (transparent window) provided in the front cover of the slot machine, the positional relationship of each reel, and an effective line. It is a figure which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to the kind of combination, the number of payout, etc., and a combination. It is a figure which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to the kind of combination, the number of payout, etc., and a combination. It is a figure which shows the kind of winning and the winning probability for every gaming state. It is a figure which shows in more detail the relationship with the kind and content of the overlapping winning combination of a combination, and a pushing order. It is a flowchart which shows the process (M_PRG_START) when starting the program by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S22. It is a flowchart which shows the control command set 1 (S_CMD_SET). It is a flowchart which shows the control command set 2 (SS_CMD_SET) in step S503. It is a flowchart which shows the power supply return process (M_POWER_ON) of step S23. It is a flowchart which shows the unrecoverable error process (SS_ERROR_STOP) of step S24. It is a flowchart which shows the main loop (M_MAIN) process in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) in step S102. It is a flowchart which shows the game state set (MS_ACTION_SET) in step S122. It is a flowchart which shows the game status output (MS_STATUS_OUT) in step S123. It is a flowchart which shows storage number reading (S_CREDIT_READ). It is a flowchart which shows a blocker ON (MS_BLOCKER_ON). It is a flowchart which shows the addition process (MS_MEDAL_INC) of one medal. 10 is a flowchart showing medal reading processing (S_PLAYM_READ). It is a flowchart which shows a medal limit number set processing (MS_MMAX_SET). It is a flowchart which shows medal insertion waiting (MS_STANDBY_DSP) in step S105. It is a flowchart which shows the medal management process (MS_MEDAL_CHK) in step S106. It is a flowchart which shows the care medal check process (MS_INSERT_CHK) in step S222. It is a flowchart following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the blocker off (MS_BLOCKER_OFF) in step S257. It is a flowchart which shows 1 storage number addition (MS_CREDIT_ADD). It is a flowchart which shows the storage bet process (MS_BET_IN) in step S223. It is a flowchart which shows the number of stored sheets 1 subtraction process (MS_CREDIT_DEC). It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment process (MS_MEDAL_RET) in step S221. It is a flowchart which shows the stored medal settlement process (MS_CREDIT_RET) in step S325. It is a flowchart which shows payout processing (MS_1MEDAL_PAY) of one medal. It is a flowchart following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an error display (MS_ERROR_DSP). It is a flowchart which shows an interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows LED display control (IS_LED_OUT) in step S606. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process (IS_POWER_DOWN) in step S617. It is a flowchart which shows the control command transmission in step S612. It is a flowchart which shows the program start process and main loop of a 1st sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process in a 1st sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the instantaneous interruption process in step S727. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change start process in a 1st sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change end process in a 1st sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of RWM abnormality in a 1st sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows a part of interruption process of a 1st sub control means. It is a figure which shows the image display content of the image display apparatus at the time of setting change mode and setting confirmation mode. It is a figure which shows the example which image-displayed the tone adjustment mode with the image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example which image-displayed the game standby lamp color selection mode with the image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example which displayed the frame lamp test mode on the image display apparatus.

In the present specification, the meanings of terms are as follows.
The “game medium” refers to a medium used for a game, and is a “medal” in the present embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball can be used. In addition to the actual medals, the game media include game media (data related to the game media) that are electrically stored (credit, stored) inside the gaming machine.
“Bet” refers to betting a medal (game medium) to play a game. In this embodiment, the maximum (limit) number that can be bet is set to “3” in the normal game and “2” in the MB game.

  “Reservation” refers to crediting a medal into the slot machine 10, unlike the “bet”. “Storage” may be used to include a bet, but in this specification, “storage” is used to mean that “bet” is not included. In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number that can be stored is set to “50” regardless of the gaming state or the like.

“Care” means that a player directly inserts a medal from a medal insertion slot 43 described later.
The “care bet” means that the player bets a medal by cleaning the medal from the medal insertion slot 43.
“Maintenance storage” means that a player stores medals by adding medals from the medal slot 43 (adding credits).
“Bet medal” means a bet medal.
“Reserved medals” refers to medals stored as credits.

The “reserved bet” is a game in which a player operates a bet switch 40, which will be described later, to play a part or all of the medals stored as credits within a possible bet range of the game. To bet.
“Automatic bet” means that when a replay wins, the number of medals bet in the previous game is automatically bet by the internal control processing of the slot machine 10. Note that the maintenance bet medals, the stored bets medals, and the stored medals can be settled thereafter, but the medals that are automatically bet by the replay winning are set so that the settlement cannot be performed.

“Inserting” means betting or storing medals, including the above-described care bets, care storage, storage bets, and automatic bets.
“Checkout” refers to paying out a bet medal and / or a stored medal to a player.
“Payout” refers to paying out medals by the above-mentioned settlement, or paying out medals to a player based on winning a winning combination, storing as credits, or paying out actual medals from the payout slot 14 That means. The payout in this embodiment is controlled so that “50” is stored as the limit number, and medals for which the stored number exceeds “50” are paid out to the player based on the winning combination.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is an external perspective view showing a slot machine 10 (game machine) according to the present embodiment.
FIG. 2 is a front view of the front cover 11 of the slot machine 10 in FIG. 1 as viewed from the inner surface side (seen from the player side).
Further, FIG. 3 is a front view of the inside of the base portion 12 as viewed from the player side with the front cover 11 opened in FIG.
In the following description of FIGS. 1 to 3, the arrangement of each device provided in the slot machine 10 will be mainly described, and a specific description of each device will be given in FIG. 4 (block diagram) to be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the housing of the slot machine 10 includes a front cover 11 (also referred to as “front door”) and a base portion 12 (“back box” or “cabinet” whose front side is closed by the front cover 11. ")"). Although not shown in FIG. 1, when the front cover 11 is opened, the opening is detected by a door switch 16 described later.

The front cover 11 is attached to the base portion 12 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the front surface (opening surface) of the base portion 12. As shown in FIG. 1, on the player side of the front cover 11, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, three stop switches 42, a medal slot 43, and the like are arranged. Furthermore, a storage number display LED 71, an acquisition number display LED 72, and an information display LED 73 are provided on the left side of the bet switch 40.
A display window 13 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front cover 11 so that a part of the reel 31 disposed therein can be seen through.
Note that a storage number display LED 71, an acquisition number display LED 72, and an information display LED 73 may be provided on the display window 13 (for example, on the left side of the viewing area of the reel 31). In this case, a display substrate 70 described later is disposed on the back side of the display window 13.

Furthermore, an effect lamp 21 (the lamp provided on the front cover 11 may be referred to as a frame lamp 21) is arranged in a substantially frame shape on the upper part and the side part of the front cover 11. Further, an image display device 23 is provided above the display window 13, and speakers 22 are arranged on both sides thereof.
Further, a medal payout port 14 and a medal tray 15 are provided at a lower portion of the front cover 11. Furthermore, speakers 22 are also provided on both sides of the medal payout opening 14.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the second sub-control board is arranged on the back surface side of the front cover 11 so as to overlap the image display device 23 in the upper part of the display window 13, that is, the portion where the image display device 23 is arranged. (Second sub-control means) 90 is arranged. The second sub control board 90 is accommodated in a transparent board case.

  On the other hand, the base portion 12 is constructed by assembling wood or the like into a hollow box shape having an open front side. As shown in FIG. 3, a medal payout device including a power supply unit 50 having a power switch 51 for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10 and a hopper tank 35a in the lower portion of the base portion 12 is provided. 35 is provided. In FIG. 3, a sub tank 35 b for receiving medals overflowing from the hopper 35 a is arranged on the right side of the hopper 35 a.

  A plate-shaped reel base is fixed to the upper part of the medal payout device 35, and a symbol display device 30 including three reels 31 is provided on the reel base. A symbol is arranged on the reel 31 as will be described later, and the symbol on the reel 31 is visible to the player through the display window 13.

Furthermore, a main control board (main control means) 60 is disposed on the inner surface side of the base body 12 and above the symbol display device 30. The main control board 60 is accommodated in a transparent board case. In order to prevent fraud of the main control board 60 (ROM replacement, etc.), this board case accommodates the main control board 60 inside, and then caulking or welding (welding with ultrasonic waves, welding with UV curing agents, electric heating, etc.) It is sealed by welding or the like. The main control board 60 is electrically connected to the first sub-control board 80 described above by a harness or optical fiber (bundle of electrical wiring) (not shown).
As shown in FIG. 3, a board (a board electrically connected to the main control board 60) different from the main control board 60 is provided so as to be adjacent to the right side of the main control board 60. A setting key switch 52 and a setting change / reset switch 53 are mounted on the substrate.

On the main control board 60, a set value display LED 63 for displaying the set value is mounted. In FIG. 3, a setting key switch (setting key insertion slot) 52 and a setting change / reset switch 53 are provided on the right side of the main control board 60. The setting key switch 52 and the setting change / reset switch 53 are covered with a transparent cover, and a setting door switch 54 (described later) for detecting whether the cover is opened or closed is provided.
Further, in FIG. 3, a first sub-control board (first sub-control means) 80 is disposed on the left inner side of the base portion 12 further on the left side of the left reel 31. The first sub-control board 80 is accommodated in a board case, and the board case is sealed by caulking or welding, like the main control board 60.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.
The slot machine 10 includes a main control board 60 and sub control boards (first sub control board 80 and second sub control board 90).
The main control board 60 has an input port (0 to 2) and an output port (0 to 6), and includes an RWM (main memory) 61, a main CPU 62, and the like (not meant to include only those illustrated in FIG. ).

In practice, an MPU including a main CPU 62, an RWM 61, and a ROM is mounted on the main control board 60. In the following description, the MPU may also be referred to as the main CPU 62. Further, the storage means is used to include the MPU built-in RWM 61, ROM, and register (storage circuit).
In contrast, an MPU including a main CPU 82, an RWM 81, and a ROM is mounted on a first sub-control board 80 described later, and an external RWM 81 is provided outside the MPU.
Similarly, the second sub control board 90 is equipped with an MPU including a main CPU 92, an RWM 91, and a ROM, and an external RWM 91 outside the MPU.
Note that any of the main control board 60, the first sub control board 80, and the second sub control board 90 may include an external ROM other than those mounted in the MPU.

  The main control board 60 and the peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as the bet switch 40 illustrated in FIG. 1 are electrically connected via an input port or an output port. The input port is a connection unit to which signals such as operation switches are input, and the output port is a connection unit that transmits signals to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.

In FIG. 4, an input peripheral device displays a signal from the peripheral device as an arrow directed to the main control board 60, and an output peripheral device is directed from the main control board 60 to the peripheral device. This is indicated by an arrow (the same applies to the first sub-control board 80 and the second sub-control board 90).
The push button 83 (also referred to as “push button unit”) connected to the first sub control board 80 can transmit and receive signals in both directions. Specifically, a signal indicating that the operation has been performed is transmitted to the first sub control board 80 based on the operation of the push button, and the push button 83 is provided from the first sub control board 80 or the second sub control board 90. The lamp is turned on.

  In addition, as a timing for causing the push button 83 to emit light, the game history information (the total number of executions of the normal game, the number of executions of the AT, the number of executions of the sub BB, etc.) can be displayed, After operation of the start switch 41 when outputting a specific effect that can be switched between effects, after the first stop operation of the reel 31, and the like. At this time, it is conceivable that the emission color is “white” during the game standby and “white, blue, red, etc.” during the game according to the expected degree of winning the AT.

The RWM (main memory) 61 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data based on the progress of the game.
The ROM is a storage medium that stores programs necessary for the progress of the game, various data (for example, a data table), and the like.
The main CPU 62 refers to a CPU provided on the main control board 60, and executes programs and calculations necessary for the progress of the game. Specifically, the lottery of the role, the drive control of the reel 31, and the winning Execute paying out.

As shown in FIG. 4, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are configured to pass through a medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 4, the medal selector includes a passage sensor 43a, a blocker 45, and insertion sensors 44a and 44b (but not limited to these), and is electrically connected to the main control board 60. .
When a medal is inserted from the medal slot 43, the passage sensor 43a first detects the medal.

  Further, a blocker 45 is provided on the downstream side of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disallowing the insertion of medals. When the insertion of medals is not permitted, the blocker 45 provides a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 from the payout slot 14. Form. On the other hand, when the medal insertion is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medal inserted from the medal insertion port 43 to the hopper 35a is formed.

  Here, the blocker 45 is in a state where the insertion of medals is not permitted during the game (from the start of the rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 are stopped and the payout corresponding to the winning combination is completed at the time of winning the winning combination). To do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the insertion of medals at least when a game is not being performed.

  On the further downstream side of the blocker 45, input sensors 44a and 44b (optical sensors) are provided. Therefore, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 are further detected by the insertion sensors 44a (upstream side) and 44b (downstream side) after being detected by the passage sensor 43a. As shown in FIG. 4, in the description to be described later, the upstream closing sensor 44a may be referred to as the closing sensor 1 and the downstream closing sensor 44b may be referred to as the closing sensor 2.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 60 is electrically provided with a settlement switch 46, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, and a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42 as operation switches operated by the player. It is connected to the.

The settlement switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) medals stored (credited) in the slot machine 10.
The bet switch 40 is a switch operated by the player when betting a stored medal for the game. The bet switch 40 includes a case where only a bet switch for betting a maximum number of medals (for example, 3) is provided, a 1-bet switch 40 for inserting 1 sheet, and a 3-bet switch 40 for inserting 3 sheets. There are cases where a plurality of them are provided.
In addition to this, a bet switch for two bets may be provided. Of the bet switches for one, two and three bets, two or three can be provided depending on the specifications of the slot machine 10.

The start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of left, middle and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, and right) reels 31 and are operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a display substrate 70 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 60. In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 60 and the display board 70, and the main control board 60 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 70 are connected. In FIG. 4, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. Thus, the main control board 60 and the display board 70 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected (via a harness or the like), but may be connected via another separate board (a relay board or the like). For example, one or more other boards (such as relay boards) may be interposed between the main control board 60 and the first sub control board 80, and the first sub control board 80 and the second sub control board 90 may be interposed. One or more other substrates (such as relay substrates) may be interposed between the two.

  A storage number display LED 71, an acquisition number display LED 72, and a status display LED 73 are connected to the display substrate 70. As shown in FIG. 1, these LEDs 71 to 73 are provided at a left end portion of an operation switch operated by the player, and are provided at a position where the player can always visually recognize. It is not necessary that all the LEDs 71 to 73 are provided on one display substrate 70. For example, a plurality of display substrates 70 such as display substrates 70A, 70B,. Any of the LEDs 71 to 73 may be provided.

FIG. 5 is a plan view showing the storage number display LED 71, the acquisition number display LED 72, and the status display LED 73 in more detail. In FIG. 1, when the storage number display LED 71, the acquisition number display LED 72, and the status display LED 73 are viewed from right above, they are as shown in FIG.
Further, in FIG. 5, a display substrate 70 (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 5) is disposed inside the slot machine 10 below the storage number display LED 71, the acquired number display LED 72, and the status display LED 73.

The storage number display LED 71 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored in the slot machine 10 and includes a digit 1 that displays an upper digit and a digit 2 that displays a lower digit. That is, the storage number display LED 71 displays two digits.
Further, “digit” means a display unit (display), and in the present embodiment, it is composed of a seven segment display (seven segment display unit, so-called 7-segment).

The acquired number display LED 72 is an LED for displaying the number of payouts when winning a winning combination, and is composed of a digit 3 for displaying an upper digit and a digit 4 for displaying a lower digit. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 72 displays two digits, like the storage number display LED 71.
The acquisition number display LED 72 normally displays the acquisition number, but functions as an LED for displaying the content (type) of an error when an error occurs, and may be referred to as an “acquisition number (or error) display LED 72”. .

The storage number display LED 71 displays the number of stored medals, and in this embodiment, displays a number between “00” and “50” (integer).
For example, in a state where no medals are bet and stored, the display of the storage number display LED 71 is “00”. Here, when one medal is maintained, the one medal is bet for the game. When two more cards are additionally inserted, three medals are bet for the game (when the bet limit number is three). Therefore, when up to three medals are maintained, the medals are bet and not stored. As medals continue to be maintained, medals are stored in the slot machine 10 and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 71.

  In this embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored sheets reaches 50 (when “50” is displayed on the stored number display LED 71), medals are not stored any more. In this state, if a medal is maintained from the medal insertion slot 43, the maintained medal is returned from the payout slot 14 by the blocker 45.

Further, the acquisition number display LED 72 displays the number of medals to be paid out when winning a winning combination. Further, the acquisition number display LED 72 displays an error code instead of the acquisition number displayed so far when an error occurs.
The acquired number display LED 72 is “00” when there is no medal to be paid out. For example, when the bell 02 wins and one medal is paid out, the display of the acquired number display LED 72 is “00”. To “01”.
The acquired number display LED 72 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no medals to be paid out.

  Here, when a winning combination (excluding replay) is awarded and a medal corresponding to the winning combination is paid out, the medal is stored in the slot machine 10 in preference to being paid out from the payout slot 14. Is done. For example, when the stored number before winning the bell 02 is “10”, the display of the acquisition number display LED 72 is updated from “00” to “01” and the storage number display LED 71 is displayed. Is updated from “10” to “11”.

  Furthermore, when the winning number is “50” when the winning combination is won, the portion exceeding “50” is paid out from the payout port 14. For example, if the number of stored coins is “47” before winning the winning combination and eight medals are paid out by winning the bell 01, three are stored and the stored number becomes “50”, which exceeds “50”. The sheets are paid out from the payout port 14.

  Further, at the time of replay winning, medals are not stored and paid out, and the number of medals bet in the game are automatically bet for replay. For example, if the game is played with 2 bets (2) and a replay wins, 2 medals are automatically bet. Similarly, when the game is played with 3 bets (3 cards) and the replay wins, 3 medals are automatically bet. Since the automatic bet based on the replay winning is the insertion of medals for replaying, even if the settlement (return) operation is performed thereafter, the medals cannot be settled.

  According to the “Rules for Game Machine Approval and Type Approval, etc.”, if the combination of symbols corresponding to replay is stopped on the active line, it is the operation of the condition device related to replay and not “winning” Interpreted. However, in the present application (this specification and the like), replay is also treated as one of the roles (replaying game), and the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay is stopped on the active line is referred to as “replay winning”.

In FIG. 5, the status display LED 73 is composed of seven LEDs (73a to 73g).
The replay display LED 73a is an LED that is lit when a replay is won, and when an automatic bet is made based on the replay win, the replay display LED 73a is lit almost simultaneously to notify the player that the bet state is automatic.

  At the time of winning a normal replay, medals are automatically inserted immediately after all reels 31 are stopped, and the replay display LED 73a is turned on. On the other hand, at the time of winning the bell replay, a freeze is executed, and during this freeze, the replay display LED 73a is kept off. When the freeze is released and the automatic insertion of medals is performed, the replay display LED 73a is turned on. As a condition for releasing the freeze, not only the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) but also the condition for detecting a medal by the passage sensor 43a may be used as the release condition. At this time, in order to set the medal detected by the passage sensor 43a as a normal medal, the blocker 45 is turned on under the condition that the medal detection by the passage sensor 43a is performed (and the number of stored sheets is not 50). May be.

Furthermore, it is not necessary to accompany the freeze at the time of winning the bell replay. In that case, a predetermined condition (for example, at least one of detecting a medal by the passage sensor 43a, detecting an operation of the start switch 41, or detecting an operation of the bet switch 40) is satisfied. Accordingly, the replay display LED 73a can be lit. Further, the medal automatic insertion process can be performed under the same conditions.
Here, in the present embodiment, a replay in which the “bell” symbol set can be stopped and displayed on a straight line (on an invalid line) in the display window 13 is referred to as a bell replay. Cherry replay that can be stopped and displayed on the torso, “Watermelon” (“Watermelon A” or “Watermelon B”) symbol is provided with a watermelon play that can be stopped and displayed in a straight line in the display window 13, and in the same way as the above-mentioned bell replay The process may be executed.

  In this way, when a replay that looks like a small role such as a bell replay (hereinafter also referred to as “small role replay”) wins, the replay display LED 73a is not immediately turned on, so that the small role is given to the player. You can recognize that you have won. At this time, on the first sub control board 80 and the second sub control board 90 side, an effect that makes the player recognize that the small role has won (winned) (for example, the back of the symbol corresponding to the small role) By performing lighting of the lamp, lighting of the bet lamp that prompts the user to operate the bet switch 40, and the effect by the image display device 23, it is possible to recognize that the small role has won. In particular, when such a small role replay wins and wins in a state where the winning probability of replay is high, it is possible to prevent the player from monotonizing the game (a state where only one type of replay wins frequently). it can.

In addition, in the game where the small role replay is won, it is possible to change the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed depending on the pressing order of the stop switch 42.
For example, in a game in which the bell replay A and the bell replay B are provided and the bell replay A is won, the “bell” alignment is operated by pressing the middle right and left in the order of pressing, and the “bell” alignment is a predetermined symbol combination line (invalid line). Stop display on the top (replay X wins), otherwise the “bell” alignment will not stop display on the symbol combination line (however, other replay X or other parts constituting the bell replay A) (Replay wins)
On the other hand, in a game won by Bell Replay B, the “bell” alignment is stopped and displayed on the symbol combination line (invalid line) by operating the stop switch 42 in the order of pressing left and right (replay Y or bell). The other replays constituting the replay B will win), and in the other pressing order, the “bell” alignment is not stopped and displayed on the symbol combination line (however, the replay Y wins). It is done.

The above method can be used, for example, in an AT game when a “bell” alignment is displayed to suggest a chance (such as an AT addition). For example, according to the game state (high probability, etc.) on the sub-control means side, in the game won in the bell replay A or the replay B, it is determined whether or not to notify the pressing order in which the “bell” alignment is displayed, During the AT game, it becomes possible to vary the display frequency of the “bell” assortment.
At this time, as described above, it is preferable to employ a betting process or a notification process when winning a small role replay.
Note that it is not always necessary to execute such processing when winning a small role replay. For example, in some winning combinations or gaming states (RT state, sub bonus state, sub controlling means gaming state) Depending on whether or not to execute, it may be controlled.

The insertable display LED 73b is an LED that lights up when a medal can be inserted. That is, it lights up before the game is finished and a medal for shifting to the next game is inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. In the present embodiment, even after the replay is activated, it lights up when a bet can be made according to the number of stored items.
In the present embodiment, the settlement display LED 73c is an LED that is lit during the settlement process. When the settlement switch 46 is turned on in a state where there is a stored medal and / or a bet medal (excluding an automatic bet at the time of replay winning), the light is lit while the medal is actually paid out.

  The game start LED 73d is an LED that lights up when a medal is inserted and the start switch 41 becomes operable. Therefore, it does not light up when no medal is bet (or when replay is not automatically inserted).

  The (1 piece, 2 pieces, 3 pieces) insertion display LEDs 73e to 73g are LEDs for displaying the number of medals bet, respectively. When one medal is bet, “1 BET (1 piece insertion display LED 73e) is displayed. ) ”Is lit and when two medals are bet,“ 1 BET (one-sheet insertion display LED 73e) ”and“ 2 BET (two-sheet insertion display LED 73f) ”are lit and three medals are betted. At this time, “1 BET (1 sheet insertion display LED 73e)”, “2 BET (2 sheet insertion display LED 73f)” and “3 BET (3 sheet insertion display LED 73g)” are lit.

6 and 7 are circuit diagrams showing wiring of electric signals among the main control board 60, the display board 70, the digits 1 to 5, and the status display LED 73.
In this embodiment, the digit includes five digits 1 to 5. And as above-mentioned, the digits 1 and 2 comprise the storage number display LED71, and the digits 3 and 4 comprise the acquisition number display LED72. Further, the digit 5 is 7 segments corresponding to the set value display LED 63. As shown in FIG. 6, the set value display LED 63 that is the digit 5 is mounted on the main control board 60. On the other hand, the digits 1 to 4 (the stored number display LED 71 and the acquired number display LED 72) are mounted on the display substrate 70 as described above. Further, the seven LEDs constituting the status display LED 73 are also mounted on the display substrate 70.

As shown in FIG. 6, on the main control board 60, a main CPU 62 and three ICs (IC1, IC2, and IC3) are mounted. The main control board 60 is actually provided with ICs in addition to these three, but is not shown in the present embodiment.
IC1 is an IC related to digit signal control, and IC2 is an IC related to segment signal control. IC3 is an IC related to the control of the motor 32 of the middle reel 31 and the input display LEDs 73e to 73g.

  Each of IC1 to IC3 includes a clock signal input terminal. On the other hand, the main CPU 62 has XCS1, XCS2, and XCS3 output terminals, the XCS1 output terminal and the clock input terminal of IC1 are connected, the XCS2 output terminal and the clock input terminal of IC2 are connected, and the XCS3 output terminal Are connected to the clock input terminal of IC3.

The main CPU 62 has D0 to D7 output terminals. The D0 to D4 input terminals of the IC1 and the D0 to D4 output terminals of the main CPU 62 are connected. Furthermore, although IC1 is provided with D5-D7 input terminals, these are connected to the ground.
Further, the D0 to D7 output terminals of the main CPU 62 and the D0 to D7 input terminals of the IC 2 are respectively connected.
Further, the D0 to D3 and D5 to D7 output terminals of the main CPU 62 and the D0 to D3 and D5 to D7 input terminals of the IC3 are respectively connected. Furthermore, the IC 3 is provided with a D4 input terminal, and the D4 input terminal is connected to the ground.

IC1 has an output port 0 (see FIG. 12 described later) composed of D0 to D7 output terminals, and D0 to D7 input terminals correspond to D0 to D7 output terminals, respectively. And the digit 1-5 signal line comes out from D0-D4 output terminal, respectively, and it connects with the digit 1-5 signal line (3rd-7th) of the display board 70 in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12, D5-D7 output terminal of the output port 0 is unused (NC).
IC2 has an output port 1 (see FIG. 12) composed of D0 to D7 output terminals, and D0 to D7 input terminals correspond to D0 to D7 output terminals, respectively. Then, the segment A to P signal lines come out from the D0 to D7 output terminals, respectively, and are connected to the segment A to P signal lines (# 8 to # 15) of the display substrate 70 in FIG.

Furthermore, the signal line from the D4 output terminal of the IC 1 is connected to the digit 5, that is, the set value display LED 63.
The digit 5 has seven LEDs (a to g), and the segment A to G signals are connected to the a to g LEDs, respectively.

  Furthermore, IC3 has an output port 4 (see FIG. 13) consisting of D0 to D7 output terminals, and D0 to D7 input terminals and D0 to D7 output terminals correspond to each other. The D4 output terminal is unused (NC). Further, the D0 to D2 output terminals are connected to the excitation signal line of the motor 32 of the middle reel 31 as shown in FIG. 13, but are omitted in the description of FIGS.

Furthermore, from the D5 to D7 output terminals of the output port 4, one sheet insertion display signal line, two sheet insertion display signal lines, and three sheet insertion display signal lines respectively come out, and one sheet of the display board 70 in FIG. This is connected to the insertion display signal line (No. 16), the two-sheet insertion display signal line (No. 17), and the three-sheet insertion display signal line (No. 18).
Note that the outputs from the D0 to D7 output terminals of the above-described IC1 to IC3 continue until the input of the clock input terminal is turned off from on.

As shown in FIG. 7, digits 1 to 4 are connected to the display substrate 70. The output terminal (No. 3) of the digit 1 signal of the display substrate 70 and the digit 1 are connected.
Similarly, the output terminals (numbers 4 to 6) of the digits 2 to 4 signal of the display substrate 70 are connected to the digits 2 to 4, respectively.
Also, each of the digits 1 to 4 has seven LEDs (a to g) similarly to the digit 5 described above. The LEDs a to g of the digits 1 to 4 are connected to the output terminals (Nos. 8 to 14) of the segment A to G signals, respectively.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the display board 70 has seven LEDs (see FIG. 5) constituting the status display LED 73, specifically, a game start LED 73d, a settlement display LED 73c, a throw-in display LED 73b, and a replay. A display LED 73a, a 1-sheet insertion display LED 73e, a 2-sheet insertion display LED 73f, and a 3-sheet insertion display LED 73g are connected.

The game start LED 73d, the settlement display LED 73c, the throw-in display LED 73b, and the replay display LED 73e are connected to the segment P signal output terminal (No. 15).
Further, the game start LED 73d is connected to the digit 1 signal output terminal (No. 3), the settlement display LED 73c is connected to the digit 5 signal output terminal (No. 7), and the input ready display LED 73b is connected to the digit 3 signal output terminal (No. 7). No. 5), and the replay display LED 73a is connected to the output terminal (No. 6) of the digit 4 signal.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the output terminals (Nos. 16 to 18) for the 1-, 2-, and 3-sheet input display signals of the display substrate 70 are the 1, 2, and 3-sheet input display LEDs 73e to 73g, respectively. It is connected to the. Further, a + 5V power supply voltage terminal (No. 1 and No. 2) of the display substrate 70 is connected to one, two, and three-load display LEDs 73e to 73g.

  In the above configuration, in FIG. 6, the main CPU 62 normally applies a high level (about 5 V, the same applies hereinafter) voltage to the XCS1 to XCS3 output terminals, and changes from the high level to the low level (approximately zero V). The same applies to the following (when the voltage is changed by a switch (circuit) provided in the main CPU 62). For example, when it is desired to drive (select or designate) IC1, the XCS1 output terminal is activated. As a result, an active signal (chip select signal) is output from the XCS1 output terminal and input to the clock input terminal of IC1. As a result, the IC 1 is in a driving state (also referred to as a selection state or a designation state). If the XCS2 and XCS3 output terminals are activated in the same manner as described above, the IC2 and IC3 are driven.

Further, a low-level voltage is normally applied to the D0 to D7 output terminals of the main CPU 62, and a high-level voltage is applied when outputting "1" data (data signal).
For example, when a data signal of “1” is output from the D0 output terminal of the main CPU 62, the data signal is input to the D0 input terminals of IC1 to IC3. At this moment, when the XCS1 output terminal is active, the IC1 The data signal is input to the D0 input terminal.

  Furthermore, a high level voltage is normally applied to the output port 0 of the IC1, and a low level voltage is applied to the output terminal corresponding to the input terminal to which the data signal is input. For example, a data signal of “1” is output from the D4 output terminal of the main CPU 62, and at this moment, when the XCS1 output terminal is active, the data signal is input to the D4 input terminal of IC1. Then, when the D4 output terminal of the IC 1 is set to the low level, a current can flow through the LEDs a to g of the digit 5.

Furthermore, when a data signal of “1” is output from the D0 and D1 output terminals of the main CPU 62 and the XCS2 output terminal is activated, the data signal is input to the D0 and D1 input terminals of the IC2.
A high level voltage is normally applied to the output port 1 of the IC 2. When a high level voltage is applied, the circuit after the transistor in FIG. 6 is in a high impedance state (not in a low or high state).

When the D0 and D1 output terminals of IC2 are set to the low level, a current flows from the emitter to the collector of the transistor connected to the high level (+ 5V) with the change in the current between the emitter and the base, and the segment A and B signal lines are connected. Current flows.
Therefore, as described above, when the D4 output terminal of the IC1 is set to the low level and the current can flow through the LEDs a to g of the digit 5, the D0 and D1 output terminals of the IC2 as described above. Is set to a low level, a current flows through the segment A and B signal lines, and the LEDs a and b of the digit 5 are turned on.
In other words, although a current flows through the segment A and B signal lines of the digits 1 to 5, a voltage of about 5 V is applied to the digits 1 to 4, so that no potential difference occurs and a corresponding to the digits 1 to 4 And b LEDs are not lit. That is, a current flows through the digit 5 to which approximately 0 V is applied, and the LEDs a and b of the digit 5 are turned on.

For example, the D0 output terminal of IC1 is set to low level.
Further, when the D7 output terminal of IC2 is set to the low level, a current flows from the emitter connected to the high level to the collector and a current flows to the segment P signal line in accordance with a change in the current between the emitter and the base. As a result, the game start LED 73d is turned on in FIG.
In other words, although a current flows through the segment P signal lines of the digits 1 to 5, a voltage of about 5 V is applied to the digits 2 to 5, so there is no potential difference and the input corresponding to the digit 3 can be made. The display LED 73b, the replay display LED 73a associated with the digit 4, and the settlement display LED 73c associated with the digit 5 are not lit. That is, a current flows through the digit 1 to which approximately 0 V is applied, and the game start LED 73d associated with the digit 1 is turned on.

Further, a low level voltage is normally applied to the D0 to D7 output terminals of the output port 4 of the IC3. When a high level voltage is applied to any of the D5 to D7 output terminals of IC3, a current flows from the collector of the transistor to the emitter, and the collector side of the transistor is at a low level.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7, a high level voltage is always applied to the power supply voltage terminals (No. 1 and No. 2) connected to the upstream side of the one, two, and three-load display LEDs 73e to 73g. Has been. Accordingly, in FIG. 6, for example, if the D5 output terminal of IC3 is set to the high level, the 16th terminal of the 1-sheet insertion display signal in FIG. 7 becomes the low level, and the current flows to the one-sheet display LED 73e. The LED 73e lights up.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, in the circuit configuration of the present embodiment, only one of the digits 1 to 5 is set to be lit. Here, in order to be able to light all digits individually, it is necessary to provide independent wiring for each digit and for each segment. However, with this setting, the number of wires increases, the cost increases, and the assembly burden also increases.
On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, for example, in the case of a segment A signal, the number of wires can be reduced if the circuit configuration is connected to the segment A signals of all the digits 1 to 5.

And even with the circuit configuration as in this embodiment, if the digits to be turned on for each interrupt process are sequentially switched, virtually no change is made from the state in which all the digits are turned on at the same time. Can be shown).
In addition, if the LED to be lit is different for each interrupt process, power consumption can be suppressed and LED burn-in can also be suppressed.
Further, the luminance can be increased by repeating the point emission as compared with the LED that is always lit.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the relationship between the digits 1 to 5 and the segments AP.
Each digit is composed of segments A to P, of which segments A to G constitute a so-called 7-segment. Further, the segment P constitutes any one of the status display LEDs 73 (excluding the digit 2).

  As shown in FIG. 8, for example, in digits 1, segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the upper digits of the stored number display LED 71, and segment P constitutes a game start LED 73 d. As shown in FIG. 7, the digit 1 signal output terminal (No. 3) is connected to the signal line of the digit 1 and also to the signal line of the game start LED 73d. The game start LED 73d is connected to the segment P signal output terminal (No. 15) of the display board 70.

  In FIG. 8, among the digits 3, segments A to G constitute the upper digit 7-segments of the acquired number display LED 72, and the segment P constitutes a ready-to-use display LED 73b. As shown in FIG. 7, the output terminal (No. 5) of the digit 3 signal is connected to the signal line of the digit 3 and also to the signal line of the input enable display LED 73b. In addition, the enabling indicator LED 73b is connected to the segment P signal output terminal (No. 15) of the display substrate 70.

  Similarly, in FIG. 8, among the digits 4, the segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the lower digits of the acquired number display LED 72, and the segment P constitutes a replay display LED 73 a. As shown in FIG. 7, the digit 4 signal output terminal (No. 6) is connected to the signal line of the digit 4 and also to the signal line of the replay display LED 73a. The replay display LED 73a is connected to the segment P signal output terminal (No. 15) of the display substrate 70.

  In FIG. 8, among the digits 5, segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the set value display LED 63, and a segment P constitutes a settlement display LED 73c. As shown in FIG. 6, the digit 5 itself is mounted on the main control board 60, but as shown in FIG. 6, the output terminal (No. 7) of the digit 5 signal is connected to the signal line of the settlement display LED 73c. It is connected. Further, the settlement display LED 73c is connected to an output terminal (No. 15) of the segment P signal of the display substrate 70.

  From the above, for example, when all the segments (segments A to P) of the digit 1 are turned on, the storage number display LED 71 (upper digit) displays “8” and the segment P by turning on the segments A to G. The game start LED 73d is lit in the status display LED 73 by turning on.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an LED display request flag and an LED display request counter.
The LED display request flag is a flag indicating which LEDs can be turned on, and is stored in the RWM 61 as 1-byte data consisting of 8 bits (D0 to D7).
For example, when the LED display request flag can display the digits 1 and 2, that is, the upper and lower digits of the stored number display LED 71, the D0 and D1 bits are “1”, and other digits cannot be displayed. Then, the other bits become “0”. Therefore, the LED display request flag data in this case is “00000011”.

As shown in FIG. 9, in this embodiment, during normal (during gaming and waiting for gaming), the digit 5 (setting value display LED 63) is turned off and the digits 1 to 4 are turned on. Therefore, the normal LED display request flag is “00001111”.
While the setting is being changed, the set value is displayed in the digit 5, so that the D4 bit becomes “1”, and the digits 1 and 2 (reserved number display LED 71) are not displayed and become “0”, and the digits 3 and 4 ( The acquired number display LED 72) becomes “1” in order to display “-”. Therefore, the LED display request flag during the setting change is “00011100”.

  Furthermore, during the setting confirmation, the setting value is displayed in the digit 5 as in the case of changing the setting, so the D4 bit becomes “1”. Further, the digits 1 to 4 are the same as those in the normal state. Therefore, the LED display request flag during setting confirmation is “00011111”.

The LED display request flag is a flag whose value varies depending on whether it is normal, setting change, or setting confirmation.
On the other hand, the LED display request counter is 1-byte data consisting of 8 bits (D0 to D7), similar to the LED display request flag, but data whose value is updated every timer interrupt (2.235 ms). is there. As shown in FIG. 9, "00010000" is taken as an initial value, and the digit to be turned on ("1") is updated to shift right by one digit (execute a shift instruction) for each interrupt process. . When the value of the LED display request counter is “00000001”, it becomes “00000000” at the next interruption, but when it becomes “0” after the update, the initial value is again “0” at the interruption. "00010000". Note that the initial value “00010000” may be set at the next interrupt when all the bits become “0”.
Also, the assignment of digits to each bit of the LED display request flag and LED display request counter shown in FIG. 9 is not limited to that shown in FIG. For example, D0 to D2 can be unused and D3 to D7 can be assigned to each digit.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, as a result of performing an AND operation on the LED display request flag and the LED display request counter, a digit “1” is a lighting target at the time of the interrupt processing.
As will be described later, when an error content (number) in the case where an unrecoverable error has occurred in the slot machine 10 is displayed as an LED, the LED display request flag or the LED display request counter is not referred to.
On the other hand, in the case of a normal error (an error that can be restored without turning on / off the power), as in the normal state, the result of AND operation of the LED display request flag and the LED display request counter indicates It becomes a lighting target.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an LED segment table stored in the ROM. The LED segment table is a data table that stores an address and an offset value (deviation from the head address) and segment data for each address, that is, data indicating which segment is lit. For example, the address “1211” is the head address of the LED segment table, that is, the offset value “0”, and “3F” in hexadecimal (“00111111” in binary) is stored as the segment data.

The 8-bit data when the segment data is expressed in binary is represented by “D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0”, and the data of D0 to D7 are the LED segment A to P signals, respectively. Indicates on / off of.
For example, in order to display “0” in the digits, segments A to F are on and segment G is off in FIG. Therefore, the segment data at this time is “00111111”.

Therefore, in FIG. 10, the segment data of the address “1211” is “00111111”, that is, data indicating “0” in the digit.
As described above, data for displaying “0”, “1”, “2”,... In digits is stored in order starting from the address “1211”.
The use of the offset value in FIG. 10 will be described later (step S635 in FIG. 49).

Returning to FIG.
The main control board 60 is electrically connected to the motor 32 of the symbol display device 30 and the like.
The symbol display device 30 includes a reel 31 (three in this embodiment) that displays symbols, a motor 32 that drives each reel 31, and a reel sensor 39 that detects the position of the reel 31.

  The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 62 c described later. Here, the reel 31 includes a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 that is operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

  The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination) is attached is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. The specific arrangement of the symbols on the reel 31 will be described later (FIG. 14).

  Each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided in a convex shape on, for example, the circumferential side surface of the reel 31 and is used when detecting whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has rotated one time, or the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 39. The signal of the reel sensor 39 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. When the index detects (cuts) the in-reel sensor 39, the input signal is input to the main control board 60, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

  Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 39 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in advance in the RWM 61 (main ROM). Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected.

  The medal payout device 35 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. The medal payout device 35 detects a hopper 35a for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when the medals of the hopper 35a are paid out from the payout port 14, and a medal paid out from the hopper motor 36. Payout sensors 37a and 37b.

The medals that are maintained and received from the medal slot 43 are formed so as to be accommodated in the hopper 35a through a predetermined passage (also referred to as “chute portion”).
The payout sensors 37a and 37b are provided with a payout sensor 37a on the upstream side and a payout sensor 37b on the downstream side, similarly to the input sensors 44a and 44b.
As shown in FIG. 1, in the following description, the upstream payout sensor 37a may be referred to as the payout sensor 1, and the downstream payout sensor 37b may be referred to as the payout sensor 2.

  The payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged at a predetermined distance, and are configured to be detected by the payout sensor 37b after a predetermined time has elapsed since the medal was detected by the payout sensor 37a. Then, based on the timing when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the medals have been paid out correctly.

For example, when the signals of the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both off despite the hopper motor 36 being driven, it is determined that no medal has been paid out, and a hopper error (no medal) is detected. Is done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals from the payout sensor 37a or 37b remains on, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred. Note that only one payout sensor 37 may be provided to detect the error.

  The full sensor 38 is a sensor that detects the fullness of the sub tank 35b (see FIG. 3) that stores medals overflowing from the hopper 35a, and is a circuit that is energized when the medals come into contact when the medals in the sub tank 35b become full. Consists of

In FIG. 4, a door switch 16 is a switch that is turned on when the front cover 11 of the slot machine 10 is opened, and detects the open / closed state of the front cover 11.
The power switch 51 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 52 is a switch that is turned on when a setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot and is rotated 90 degrees to the right, and is turned on when confirming the setting or changing the setting.

The setting change / reset switch 53 is a switch that serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch. Note that the setting change switch and the reset switch may be provided separately.
The setting change / reset switch 53 is operated when changing a setting value. When the power switch 51 is turned on while the setting key switch 52 is turned on, reset, that is, initialization processing is performed, and predetermined data stored in the RWM 61 is cleared.

  The setting door switch 54 is a switch that detects opening / closing of the setting door (the door that covers the setting key switch 52 and the setting change / reset switch 53). For example, an error occurs when the setting door switch 54 is off, that is, when the setting key switch 52 is on while the setting door is not opened.

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the input ports 0 to 2 provided on the main control board 60. 12 and 13 are diagrams illustrating output ports 0 to 6 provided on the main control board 60. FIG.
The input ports 0 to 2 and the output ports 0 to 6 of this embodiment are 1-byte ports to which 8 bits D0 to D7 can be input or output.
The input port and the output port are provided in addition to those shown in the figure, but the description thereof is omitted in this embodiment.

  In FIGS. 11 to 13, a port indicated as unused means a signal input / output port that is not actually used or a description of which is omitted in this embodiment (a port without signal input / output). Does not mean all unused).

  The input port 0 receives signals from an adjustment switch 46, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, and a stop switch 42, which are operation switches. In the example of FIG. 11, the 1-bet switch signal (D1 bit) and the 3-bet switch signal (D2 bit) are separated. However, when the slot machine 10 has only the 3-bet switch 40, The D1 bit of input port 0 is unused.

The input port 1 receives signals from the passage sensor 43a, the door switch 16, the setting door switch 54, the setting key switch 52, the setting change / reset switch 53, and the (left, middle, right) reel sensor 39. .
Furthermore, the input port 2 includes a power interruption signal (a signal output when power interruption occurs), a signal from the closing sensors 1 (44a) and 2 (44b), and a dispensing sensor 1 (37a) and 2 (37b). ) Signal and the full sensor 38 signal are input. When the slot machine 10 is not provided with the setting door switch 54, the D2 bit of the input port 1 is not used.

  As will be described later, a main loop or main process (M_MAIN) that is performed once per game is provided as information processing for proceeding with the game. In the main loop, the inserted medals are detected, a winning process is performed after all the reels 31 are stopped, and the like.

  During this main loop, the main loop is temporarily exited and interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) is executed. In the interrupt process, a process of detecting the input ports 0 to 2 (step S607 in FIG. 48) is executed, and after the process is executed, a process of returning to the main loop is periodically performed again. The interval of the interrupt time is 2.235 ms in this embodiment. That is, the data of the input ports 0 to 2 is acquired for each interrupt process at intervals of 2.235 ms. Based on the acquired data, the input port level data (data indicating ON / OFF of each bit), the input port rising data (which was off at the previous interrupt and turned on at the current interrupt) Bit data) and input port falling data (data indicating which bit is the data that was turned on at the previous interrupt and turned off at the current interrupt) is generated and stored. Therefore, these data are updated every 2.235 ms.

Also, all D0 to D7 bits of the input ports 0 to 2 are detected regardless of when the interrupt processing is performed. For example, since the player cannot operate the bet switch 40 while the reel 31 is rotating (before the stop switch 42 is operated), the D1 and D2 bit data of the input port 0 are always acquired. Although not necessary, in the present invention, data of all bits is acquired. If all bits of data are acquired, error determination can be performed. For example, the rise data of the bet switch 40 is turned on while the reel 31 is rotating.
For example, if 1 byte data (8 bits) of the input port 0 is acquired, it is possible to know the on / off status of all the operation switches.

  In FIG. 12, the output port 0 is used for outputting an LED digit signal. The output port 1 is used for outputting an LED segment signal. These LED digit signal and LED segment signal are signals for turning on / off the set value display LED 63, the storage number display LED 71, the acquisition number display LED 72, and the status display LED 73.

Specifically, for example, when the data of the output port 0 is “00000001”, only the digit 1 is turned on, so only the upper digit of the storage number display LED 71 is turned on. Further, when the data of the output port 1 is “00111111”, the signals of the segments A to F are turned on, so that “0” is displayed in the digit 1.
As described above, which digit is to be lit at the output port 0 and which segment is to be lit at the output port 1 are determined.

Although not shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, in the present embodiment, LEDs are provided around the 3-bet switch 40 and the stop switch 42 (in the unit of the stop switch 42).
At the output port 2, signals for lighting the LEDs of the 3-bet switch 40 and the stop switch 42 are output. “Red” is lit when operation is not possible, and “blue” is lit when operation is possible.
In the output port 3, the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the left reel 31 are output from the D0 to D3 bits. The motor 32 of this embodiment is configured to rotate the reel 31 by 1-2 phase excitation, and the reel 31 is driven by a combination of four-phase excitations of φ0 to φ3. Are respectively output from predetermined bits.

Further, a signal of the blocker 45 is output from the D6 bit. Furthermore, a drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is output from the D7 bit.
Here, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage connecting the medal insertion port 43 and the hopper 35a when the signal of the blocker is “1” (on), and when it is “0” (off), A passage (return passage) that connects the medal insertion port 43 and the payout port 14 is formed.
For example, when the blocker 45 is driven, a blocker signal is output from the D6 bit (see FIG. 12) of the output port 3 by interrupt processing.

In FIG. 13, the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the intermediate reel 31 are output from the D0 to D3 bits of the output port 4. Similarly, the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the right reel 31 are output from the D0 to D3 bits of the output port 5.
Further, from the D5 to D7 bits of the output port 4, the signals of the one, two, and three-loading display LEDs 73e to 73g in the status display LED 73 are output.

Furthermore, an external signal is output from the output port 6 to the external concentrated terminal board 100, and in this example, external signals 1 to 3 are provided according to the type of the external signal. The external signal is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (a hall computer, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external concentration terminal board 100.
As described above, data based on the signals of the input ports 0 to 2 is stored in one interrupt, and signals are output to the output ports 0 to 6 based on the stored control data.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 60 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 4, the main CPU 62 of the main control board 60 includes the following setting change means 62a and the like. Note that the following means in the present embodiment are examples, and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The setting changing means 62a is a means for changing / determining a setting value.
Here, the set value defines the degree of player's advantage, more specifically, the expected value of the payout number with respect to the number of inserted medals (medals that can be acquired by the player), and is set in this embodiment. 1 to setting 6 stages are provided.
The higher the set value, the higher the advantage for the player, such as the higher the winning probability of at least some of the combinations.
Further, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of shifting to the AT and the higher the advantage for the player.

  In addition, it is not restricted only to making the probability which transfers to AT high, For example, the probability of adding up the number of games and payout number in AT may be made high, and the probability of continuing AT may be made high.

In order to set / change the set value, a power switch 51, a setting key switch 52, and a setting change / reset switch 53 are used.
In the present embodiment, when the power switch 51 is once turned off and the power is turned off, a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 52 is turned on. When the power switch 51 is turned on again in this state, the setting is being changed, that is, the setting changing mode is entered. In this case, normal startup processing is not performed. Therefore, in order to change the setting, the power switch 51 needs to be turned on / off.
The setting key may be inserted into the setting key insertion slot, rotated 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 52, and in this state, the power switch 51 may be turned off and then turned on again.

In the setting change mode, the setting changing means 62a displays the current setting value on the setting value display LED 63.
The setting change means 62a displays the setting value each time the setting change / reset switch 53 is operated (turned on): .fwdarw. "1" .fwdarw. "2" .fwdarw. "3" .fwdarw. "4" “→” 5 ”→“ 6 ”→“ 1 ”→“ 2 ”→...

Further, when the start switch 41 is turned on, the setting changing means 62a determines the setting value with the numerical value displayed on the setting value display LED 63 at this time, and “0” indicating that the setting value has been determined. Is displayed on the set value display LED 63.
Then, the setting change means 62a rotates the setting key 90 degrees counterclockwise to turn off the setting key switch 52, thereby storing the determined setting value in a predetermined storage area in the RWM 61, and after the setting change It becomes possible to play with the set value.

In the present embodiment, the determination of the setting key switch 52 being turned off is performed based on the falling data of the setting key switch 52. However, the setting key switch 52 is turned on / off. You may comprise so that it may be performed based on.
Further, it may be configured so that the game cannot be performed with the setting value after the setting change unless the setting key is removed from the setting key insertion slot.
Further, if the setting key is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise to turn off the setting key switch 52, the setting key is removed from the setting key insertion slot, and the power switch 51 is once turned off in this state and then not turned on again. You may comprise so that a game cannot be performed with the setting value after a setting change.

  Further, the main control board 60 transmits the set value stored in the RWM 61 to the first sub control board 80. The setting value is stored in the RWM 81 also on the first sub control board 80 side, and the same setting value as the setting value stored in the RWM 61 of the main control board 60 is also shared in the first sub control board 80. Then, on the first sub-control board 80 side, variables related to AT are determined, such as AT lottery is executed with a probability corresponding to the set value.

In addition, in the state where no medals are bet and the part lottery is not performed (before the start switch 41 is operated), the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot, and the setting key switch 52 is turned on. And “Settings are being confirmed”. That is, when only the set value is confirmed, it is not necessary to turn on / off the power switch 51. During the setting confirmation, the setting value at the present time is displayed on the setting display LED 63 as in the case of the setting change.
Furthermore, when the power switch 51 is turned on while the setting key switch 52 is turned on, reset, that is, initialization processing is performed. This initialization process will be described later.

The role lottery means 62b performs lottery for each game at the start of the game.
Here, the combination of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols, and the like will be described.
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the present embodiment. In FIG. 14, the symbol numbers are also shown. For example, in the left reel 31, the symbol of symbol number 20 is “bell”.

As shown in FIG. 14, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame.
As shown in FIG. 14, in the present embodiment, “watermelon” includes “watermelon A” and “watermelon B” which are different designs. Furthermore, “BAR” includes “Black BAR” and “White BAR” which are different designs.
Further, “blank” has a predetermined design and does not mean that no design is displayed on the frame.

FIG. 15 is a view showing the display window 13 (transparent window) provided on the front cover 11 of the slot machine 10, the positional relationship between the reels 31, and the effective lines.
In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction in this embodiment. Further, each reel 31 is arranged so that three symbols that are continuous in the vertical direction can be seen from the display window 11. Therefore, it is arranged so that a total of nine symbols can be seen from the display window 11 of the slot machine 10. The number on the lower right of each symbol indicates the symbol number.

  In this specification, in FIG. 15, the positions where the symbols of “watermelon A” of the left reel 31, “replay” of the middle reel 31, and “watermelon B” of the right reel 31 are stopped are “upper stage”. The position where the “bell” symbol of the left, middle and right reels 31 is stopped is called “middle stage”, “replay” of the left reel 31, “watermelon A” of the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31. The position where the “replay” symbol is stopped is referred to as “lower”.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 15, effective lines are set for nine symbols visible from the display window 11.
Here, the “effective line” is a symbol combination line that forms a symbol combination when the reel 31 is stopped, and a symbol combination corresponding to any of the combinations is the line. It is a line that will be the winning prize of that role when stopped. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, only the effective line (one line) in the middle in the horizontal direction is defined, and all the other symbol combination lines are invalid lines.

  For example, in FIG. 15, a symbol combination line passing through the upper stage of each reel 31 and a symbol combination line passing through the lower stage of the left reel 31, the middle stage of the middle reel 31, and the upper stage of the right reel 31 are also conceivable. This line is an invalid line in this embodiment. An invalid line is a line that is not set as a valid line among symbol combination lines, and even if a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations stops on that line, a profit corresponding to the combination is given. This line does not perform (medal payout etc.). In other words, the invalid line is a line that is not a target of combination of symbols in the first place.

  Conventionally, there are known slot machines in which the number of effective lines differs according to the number of medals inserted. For example, when the number of inserted medals is 1, the number of effective lines is set to 1. When the number of inserted medals is 2, the number of effective lines is set to 3. When the number of inserted medals is 3, the number of effective lines is set to 5. And so on. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, during the game, two or three medals are inserted to perform the game, and only one of the middle stage in the horizontal direction is always an effective line in all games.

16 and 17 are diagrams showing combinations of combinations of types (combinations selected by the combination lottery means 62b), the number of payouts, and the like in the present embodiment.
The roles of this embodiment are roughly classified into special roles, small roles, and replays.
A combination of symbols corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all the reels 31 are stopped, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations stops on the active line (the combination wins, the same applies hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out.

  However, the number of payouts at the time of winning a special combination (MB) is set to zero. In replay, medals are automatically inserted. Further, among the small roles (bells), in the case of the bell 01, the number of payouts in the game excluding the special game is 8, but in the special game (MB game: the prescribed number is 2), 2 payouts are made. .

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the small role includes a bell, a cherry, and a watermelon. Further, the bell has 33 types of bell 01 to bell 33. The cherry has a medium cherry and a square cherry. In addition, “ANY” in the middle cherry means that any symbol may be used (arbitrary symbol). Furthermore, the replay includes normal replay, bell replay (two types), and special replay.

  The bell 01 is a so-called “bell” -matched symbol combination, and is a symbol combination that stops when the stop switch 42 is pressed in the correct order (described later). Bells 02 to 33 are combinations of symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the pressing order is incorrect. In the bells 02 to 25, the symbol of the left reel 31 is set to “replay”. Furthermore, the design of the right reel 31 of the bell 02 to bell 07 is “red 7”, the design of the right reel 31 of the bell 08 to bell 13 is “blue 7”, and the design of the right reel 31 of the bell 14 to bell 19 is “black”. “BAR”, the design of the right reel 31 of the bell 20 to the bell 25 is “white BAR”.

  Further, in the bells 02 to 25, the symbols of the right reel 31 are the same, and the symbols of the middle reel 31 are “watermelon A”, “black BAR”, “red 7”, “cherry”, “blue”. 7 ”or“ white BAR ”.

Furthermore, for the bells 26 to 29, the design of the middle reel 31 is set to “bell”, and for the bells 30 to 33, the design of the right reel 31 is set to “bell”. .
Further, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning the bells 02 to 33 is always set to one.

In addition, the replay (re-playing combination) is a combination that enables a re-play that maintains the number of medals inserted in the game (automatic bets on medals).
The replay of this embodiment includes a normal replay, two types of bell replays, and special replays, each having a different combination of symbols.

The bell replay is a replay in which the actual winning combination is “replay” but is shown to the player as a small bell.
As shown in FIG. 15, the effective line is “middle stage”-“middle stage”-“middle stage”, and the other straight lines are all set as invalid lines.
When the bell replay 1 is won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the bell replay 1 is stopped on the middle line (effective line).

It is assumed that, for example, “Replay (No. 14)” — “Watermelon A (No. 18)” — “Replay (No. 04)” stops at the middle line when the Bell Replay 1 is won. The numbers shown in parentheses are the symbol numbers in FIG. As a result, “replay”-“watermelon A”-“replay”, which is a combination of the bell replay symbols, is stopped on the middle stage line, so that the player wins the bell replay. Further, when the combination of symbols is stopped, the invalid line “upper stage” − “upper stage” − “upper stage” has “bell (15th)”-“bell (19th)”-“bell (05th)”. That is, the bell alignment stops.
As shown in FIG. 14, even when “watermelon B” or “white BAR” stops in the middle stage when the middle reel 31 stops, the bell alignment always stops in the upper line as described above.

  In the same way as above, when the bell replay 2 is won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the bell replay 2 “Replay”-“Bell”-“Watermelon A / Watermelon B” is stopped on the middle line (effective line). , The “bell” alignment always stops at the lower right line, ie, “upper stage”-“middle stage”-“lower stage”. For example, when "Replay (09)"-"Bell (14)"-"Watermelon B (01)" stops on the middle line, on the line "Upper"-"Middle"-"Lower" Then, “Bell (No. 10)”-“Bell (No. 14)”-“Bell (No. 20)” stops.

Then, when winning a bell replay, the “bell” (small role) is output as if the “bell” (winning role) has won a prize by flashing the “bell” symbol instead of the symbol on the middle line, which is the active line. .
Further, if an automatic bet for a medal is immediately made at the time of winning the bell replay, it will appear as a replay winning, so that, for example, a freeze is executed simultaneously with the winning of the bell replay.

  Here, “freezing” means delaying the progress of the game by pausing for a predetermined period of time. For example, receiving a medal, receiving an operation of the bet switch 40, operating the start switch 41 and the stop switch 42. Is to temporarily stop the function relating to the acceptance of the (reception of the stop operation of the reel 31). Furthermore, the reel 31 may be used as an effect period during which the reel 31 performs an operation different from the normal operation. This operation is also called a pseudo game (the pseudo game will be described later).

  In the present embodiment, the freeze is started simultaneously with the winning of the bell replay, and the elapsed time is measured. When the bet switch 40 is operated before a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) elapses, the freeze is released (cancelled) by the operation of the bet switch 40. When the freeze is released, the main control board 60 controls to place an automatic bet for medals based on a bell replay winning.

  Therefore, when a game is played with three medals bet and a bell replay is won, if the player operates the bet switch 40 before 20 seconds have elapsed from the time of winning, the three medals are automatically Bet. Thus, the player can be given an impression that three medals have been bet by operating the bet switch 40, so that the bell replay can be shown in a pseudo-bell (small role).

In addition, the release of the freeze is not limited to when the bet switch 40 is operated, but can also be performed when the player cares for medals from the medal slot 43.
At the time of winning the bell replay, if the player recognizes the bell replay as a small role, the player thinks that three medals are added to the credit. Therefore, it is considered that the next game can be started by operating the bet switch 40 using the three credits.

  Further, after winning the small role, it is naturally possible to play the game by taking care of the medals before starting the next game (before operating the start switch 41). Here, after winning the bell replay and before the start of the next game, if the player takes care of a medal and returns it from the payout slot 14 without accepting the medal, the bell replay is considered to be a small role I can't show you. Therefore, when a medal care from the medal slot 43 is detected at the time of winning the bell replay, the freeze is canceled and the medal is received and stored.

  In this case, freezing is canceled when a medal is detected by the passage sensor 43a, and an automatic bet of a medal based on a win of the bell replay is performed. Further, for the medal that has been maintained, a storage process is performed. The freeze may be canceled when the insertion sensor 44a or 44b detects a medal, not limited to the passage sensor 43a. Alternatively, the freeze may be canceled when the start switch 41 is operated.

  Furthermore, of the replays, the special replay is a winning combination ("red 7" is aligned) when starting AT. When the special replay is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a predetermined pressing order (in this embodiment, right middle left), and the “red 7” symbol of each reel 31 is pressed to stop at the active line The “red 7” alignment is set to stop on the active line.

The special role is a role for shifting from the normal game to the special game. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, only MB (middle bonus, also referred to as a second type big bonus (2BB)) is provided as a special combination.
Other special roles include 1BB (first type big bonus), RB (regular bonus), and SB (single bonus), which are not provided in this embodiment.

When the MB wins, there is no payout of medals in the game, but the next game shifts to the MB game corresponding to the special game.
In addition, the 1BB game and the RB game that are shifted by winning the 1BB and RB respectively, are advantageous for the player who can expect to win more medals than the normal game because the payout rate is set to exceed 1. Game.
On the other hand, the MB of this embodiment is not directly aimed at increasing medals in MB games, but the main purpose is to create a pre-winning game state (inside) after winning the MB. And

In each of the above-mentioned combinations, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination does not stop on the active line in the game selected for the combination, a combination that is carried over after the next game and a combination that is not carried over are determined. .
The role carried over is the special role MB. When an MB is won, in the game until the MB wins, the MB is controlled to carry over after the next game.

  On the other hand, while winning of MB is carried over, small roles and replays other than MB are not carried over. In the lottery of a combination, when a small combination or replay is won, the winning combination is valid only in the game, and the winning combination is not carried over after the next game. That is, in the game won for these winning combinations, the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be won, but at the end of the game regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won. The right to the elected role will cease.

  A game in which a special role (MB) is not won (a game in which a special role is not carried over) is referred to as “non-inside”. A game in which a special role is won in a game before the game but the selected special role is not won (a game in which the special role is carried over) is called “inside”.

Returning to FIG.
The role lottery means 62b includes, for example, a random number generator for role lottery (a hardware random number, a random number generator provided in the MPU, etc.), a random number extractor that extracts a random number generated by the random number generator, And determining means for determining the presence / absence of a winning combination and the winning combination based on the random value extracted by the random number extracting means.

  The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined area (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation). Random numbers are MPUs for random numbers (hardware random numbers) in which a counter that performs 1 count at 200n (nano) sec continues counting as a cycle in the range of 0 to 65535 or a predetermined random numerical order (number sequence). Is a random number (built-in random number) that is updated every clock cycle, and continues to count the random number while the slot machine 10 is powered on.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The judging means collates the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means with the role lottery table, thereby determining the combination corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs. For example, if the extracted random number value belongs to the MB winning area, it is determined as MB winning, and if it belongs to the non-winning area, it is determined as non-winning.
The extracted random number may be processed by calculation and collated with the role lottery table.

  The combination lottery table defines the types of combinations to be selected and the winning probability of each combination. The role lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and each has a predetermined range of lottery areas.This lottery area is divided into a winning area and a non-winning area for each role, and It is set to a predetermined ratio so as to have a winning probability set in advance.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations that are drawn in each gaming state.
Here, the “game state” of the present embodiment includes a normal game and a special game. A normal game has a non-internal medium game and an internal medium game of MB. The winning probability (total value) of the replay in the internal game is about 47%. In addition, the winning probability (total value) of the replay in the non-internal game is set lower than that in the internal game. In this way, a state where the winning probability of replay in an internal game is high is referred to as internal RT, and a state where the winning probability of replay in a non-internal game is low is sometimes referred to as non-RT.

Further, the non-internal game is always a non-AT and is not an AT. Furthermore, the internal medium game has a non-AT time and a AT time. Further, the MB game is a special game as described above.
In addition, a winning lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 12, the type of winning lot and the winning probability are set.

First, in a non-internal game, MBs are drawn. And when MB is won, it shifts from the next game to an internal game. When moving to the internal game, MB is not drawn.
In game states other than special games, there are four types of replay wins.

  In addition, as the types of winning of the small role, first, there are 12 types of composite bells A1 to D3, all of which are a plurality of types of bells. Each of these winning probabilities is 1/24, and the combined winning probability is set to 1/2.

In the internal game, the winning probability of the combined bell combination is ½, the winning probability of the replay combined is about 47%, and when including the winning probability of other small roles, the non-winning probability is almost “0” (extremely Low probability).
Also, in MB games, not all the lotteries are drawn. In addition, it is also possible to perform lottery for replay. As will be described later, in the MB game, the winning flags of all the small combinations are turned on, and a gaming state in which any small combination can win a prize is entered.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of duplicate winning, the contents, and the pressing order.
First, the replay overlap win is a overlap win between normal replay and special replay. When the replay overlap win is selected, the special replay can be won (always wins in the present embodiment) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the middle right and left (reverse pressing). On the other hand, in the first stop left or middle push order, the normal replay always wins and the special replay does not win. Furthermore, the right and left middle push order is set so that a special replay is awarded when “Red 7” is stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped, and a normal replay is awarded when “Red 7” is not stopped. Yes.
Further, each of the composite bells A1 to D3 is a winning combination of five types of bells (any one of the bells 01 to 33), and any of the composite bells includes the winning of the bell 01.

Furthermore, for example, in the composite bell A1, the winning of the bell 02 and the bell 03 is included, but the symbols related to the middle reel 31 of the bell 02 and the bell 03 are “watermelon A” and “black BAR”, respectively, as shown in FIG. It is.
Similarly, in the composite bell A2, the winning of the bell 04 and the bell 05 is included, but the symbols related to the reel 31 in the bell 04 and the bell 05 are “red 7” and “cherry”, respectively, as shown in FIG. .

Similarly, the composite bell A3 includes winning of bell 06 and bell 07, but the symbols relating to the middle reel 31 of bell 06 and bell 07 are “blue 7” and “white BAR”, respectively, as shown in FIG. It is.
Similarly to the above, for the other composite bells, for example, in the composite bell B1, the symbols on the bell 31 of the bell 08 and the bell 09 are “watermelon A” and “black BAR”.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 19, the correct answer push order is assigned to each composite bell.
Specifically, the correct pressing order of the composite bells A1 to A3 is middle right and left, and the correct pressing order of the composite bells B1 to B3 is middle right and left. Furthermore, the correct answer pressing order of the composite bells C1 to C3 is in the middle right and left, and the correct answer pressing order of the composite bells D1 to D3 is right middle and left.

  For example, in the composite bell A1, the right / left push order is the correct answer push order, and the other five push orders are incorrect answer push orders. Then, in the correct answer pressing order, the bell 01 is always awarded. On the other hand, in the case of the incorrect answer pressing order, in the case of the forward pressing (at the first left stop. Including the forward pinching, the same applies hereinafter), the bell 02 or the bell 03 can be won, and the irregular pressing (here, In the case of middle first stop and right second stop or right first stop), the bell 26 or the bell 27 is awarded.

  The main CPU 62 controls on / off of the winning flag corresponding to each combination based on the lottery result of the combination by the combination lottery means 62b. In this embodiment, a winning flag (a part of the storage area of the RWM 61) is provided for each combination for each combination. When any of the winning combinations is won by the winning lottery means 62b, the winning flag for the winning combination corresponding to the winning is turned on (the winning flag is set).

  For example, in a non-internal game, when winning the composite bell A1, the winning flags relating to the bells 01, 02, 03, 26, and 27 (5 in total) are turned on, and the winning flags for the other roles are turned off. Become.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, winnings for small roles other than special roles and replays are not carried over, so even if a small role or replay is won in the game and the winning flag for these roles is turned on, At the end, the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since the winning of the MB is carried over, when the MB is won in the game and the winning flag relating to the winning MB is once turned on, the on state is maintained until the MB wins, Turned off when MB wins.

  For example, when the MB is won by the role lottery means 62b and the MB is not won in the game, when the composite bell A1 is won in the next game (internal game), the MB won in the previous game and the game The winning flags of the bells 01, 02, 03, 26, and 27 (6 in total) that were won in the above are turned on. When the MB does not win in this game, the MB winning flag is kept on. On the other hand, regardless of the game result (winning / non-winning) in the game, the five winning flags related to the composite bell A1 are turned off at the end of the game.

  The reel control means 62c controls to start rotation of all (three) reels 31 when a rotation start command for the reels 31 is received, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in this embodiment. It is. Further, the reel control means 62c selects a stop position determination table corresponding to ON / OFF of the winning flag with reference to ON / OFF of the winning flag in the game after the winning lottery is performed by the winning lottery means 62b. In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined and the motor 32 is driven and controlled based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated. Thus, the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

  For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is turned on, the reel control means 62c selects a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (the combination with the winning flag turned on) within the range of stop control of the reel 31. The reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as to be able to stop on the active line, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the winning combination (the combination whose winning flag is off) on the effective line. .

Here, “within the range of stop control of the reel 31” means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving frames (symbols)). Means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations per minute at a constant speed.
In games other than MB games, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 190 ms. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to four frames.

  For the left reel 31 in the MB game, the time from when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. As a result, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames from the design at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to one frame. Note that the middle and right reels 31 in the MB game are set to 190 ms or less (the maximum number of moving frames is 4) as described above.

  At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, when any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, when the stop switch 42 is operated In addition, the design is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.

  That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated at the time of winning the winning combination, when the symbol related to the winning winning combination does not stop at a predetermined effective line, the reel 31 is stopped before stopping. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the symbol related to the winning combination is controlled so as to be stopped on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (retraction stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped when the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of 31 stop control, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is controlled so as not to stop on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won, the priority order of winning combinations is determined in advance, and the drawing priority control of the highest priority symbol is performed according to the predetermined priority order.

Further, the reel control means 62c detects the pressing order (operation order) of the stop switch 42.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated is input to the reel control means 62c. By discriminating this signal, it is detected which stop switch 42 has been operated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during non-AT (except during AT preparation described later), the stop switch 42 to be operated first (first stop) is determined to be left (forward push) (first left). Stop instruction). Here, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the middle or right first stop (irregular pressing), for example, it is a condition for setting a penalty period for a predetermined number of games. That is, even if the irregular push is performed, the penalty period is not necessarily set. For example, a penalty period is set when one of the composite bells is won and the correct answer is reached in the pushing order, and eight sheets are paid out. However, in order to suppress irregular pressing, a warning notification is given by sound, image, lamp, etc. that the order of penalty is pressed regardless of the winning combination.

Thus, the player always digests the game as the first left stop except when the irregular push (first stop is middle or right) is notified.
Note that when the push order notification is performed during AT, the penalty is not set when the notification content is medium or right first stop.
There are various penalties to be set when the irregular key is pressed. In this embodiment, during the penalty period, the AT lottery is executed with a probability that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a probability that is further disadvantageous than the low probability described later). And the notification of the winning combination is not performed.

  The stop position determination table is provided for each on / off state of the winning flag, that is, for each lottery result of the combination by the combination lottery means 62b. The stop position determination table corresponds to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined. In each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the number 01 symbol (“watermelon A” in the case of the left reel 31) passes through the middle stage (effective line), the number of symbols is displayed. The stop position is determined in advance so that the number of symbols is stopped in the middle stage by controlling the movement only.

The stop position determination table includes the following.
The MB table is used when only the MB winning flag is ON, that is, when the MB is won in the game, or when the MB is won before the game and the game is not won, and the reel 31 Within the range of the stop control, the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB is stopped on the effective line, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the role other than the MB is not stopped on the effective line. The combination is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol related to MB is “blank” in all the reels 31 (FIG. 17). Furthermore, one “blank” is provided for the left and right reels 31 and two “blanks” are provided for the middle reel 31. Therefore, the player cannot stop “blank” on the active line unless the player operates the stop switch 42 at the timing when “blank” stops on the active line.

  Here, as described above, if the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the effective line. The fact that it is not possible to draw (draw to the effective line) is referred to as “PB (pull-in rate) ≠ 1”.

  On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), the target symbol can always be stopped (drawn) on the effective line. , Referred to as “PB = 1”.

“PB = 1” has a case in which all the reels 31 are in such a role and a case in which only a specific (partial) reel 31 is in that role.
As described above, in the first embodiment, since the maximum number of moving frames is “4”, when the target symbol is arranged at an interval within 5 symbols, “PB = 1”, which exceeds 5 symbols. When arranged at intervals, “PB ≠ 1”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the game when the MB is won in the non-internal medium game, or the game in the MB internal medium game when the role is not won, that is, a game in which the MB can be won, the stop switch is pressed in the right middle left push order. MB winning is permitted only when 42 is operated. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the other pressing order, the MB is not won (the role is not won).

In addition, since the game at the time of MB winning in the non-internal middle game is always non-AT, the push order notification is not performed. Therefore, the player operates the stop switch 42 at the first left stop so as not to be penalized, and therefore, no MB is won in the game.
Furthermore, in the game in the inside, during the non-AT, the stop switch 42 is operated with the first left stop, so that no MB is won in the game.
Further, in the internal middle game, in a game in which the MB is available and the MB can be won, a (dummy) push order for the first left stop is notified. As a result, MB winning is avoided, and the winning MB is not won when the winning combination is not won.

  In addition, as a method of avoiding the MB winning, for example, a method of avoiding winning of the winning MB by causing the player to perform a predetermined push. For example, in a game where the MB can win a prize, aim for “red 7” for the left reel 31! ”And the like, and the notification that the second“ blank ”of the left reel 31 is not stopped on the active line is given. At this time, the target “red 7” symbol may be controlled to stop on the active line, or may be controlled to stop on the invalid line.

Or, when the left and middle reels 31 are stopped, no notification is given, and only when the “Temple” of MB is formed with “blank”-“blank”-“rotating”, the right reel 31 is notified ( For example, “Aim at“ Red 7 ”!”).
Contrary to this, when MB is won, a penalty may be imposed. For example, after the MB game is over, an AT lottery is not performed for a predetermined number of games.

The composite bell A1 table is used when the composite bell A1 is won (when the winning flags of the bells 01, 02, 03, 26, and 27 are turned on), and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the stop switch The combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped is determined so that the winning bell can be won or can be won according to the pressing order of 42 and the operation timing.
In addition, composite bell A2 table to composite bell D3 table are provided as stop position determination tables when the composite bells A2 to D3 are won.

Here, as a method of stopping and controlling the reel 31 when a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously won (duplicate winning), “number priority” and “number priority” can be mentioned.
“Number priority” defines the stop position of the reel 31 so that the symbol related to the winning combination with the largest number of payouts is preferentially stopped (drawn) on the active line.
On the other hand, “number priority” defines the stop position of the reel 31 so that when the reel 31 is stopped, the number of winning combinations that can be won when the symbol is stopped on the effective line is maximized.

In the present embodiment, when the composite bell A1 is elected, the double winning combination of the bell 01 having the eight roles, the bells 02 and 03 having the single function, and the bells 26 and 27 having the same single function is made.
The same is true for other composite bells, when winning a composite bell, the winning combination of eight bells 01 and four types of single bells.

  In this embodiment, when any composite bell is won, stop control is performed based on the number priority when the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is the correct answer pressing order, and when the pressing order is the incorrect answer pressing order. Stop control based on number priority.

Hereinafter, stop control will be described by taking the composite bell A1 winning as an example.
As shown in FIG. 19, in the composite bell A1, the correct answer pressing order is “middle left and right”. Therefore, in the middle first stop, the first stop switch 42 is pushed in the correct order, and the reel control means 62c controls to stop the “bell” symbol in the middle stage.

  Next, in the second left stop, the pressing order of the second stop switch 42 is also correct (in the case of 6-selection pressing order, the correct pressing order is determined in the second stop), and the reel control means 62c controls to stop the “bell” symbol in the middle.

  At the time of the last right third stop, similarly to the left and middle reels 31, control is performed so that the “bell” symbol is stopped in the middle stage. As a result, the combination of the symbols of bell 01 is stopped on the active line, so that the winning of bell 01 is won, and in the case of a normal game, eight payouts are made.

On the other hand, when the composite bell A1 is won and the answer is incorrect, the bell 02 or the bell 03 is controlled so as to be able to win a prize by giving priority to the number at the first stop on the left.
In the first left stop, the “bell” of the left reel 31 is a symbol related to the bell 01. On the other hand, the “replay” of the left reel 31 is a symbol related to the bells 02 and 03. Therefore, when “bell” is stopped on the active line when the left reel 31 is stopped, the number of winning combinations that can be won at that time is one (bell 01), but “replay” is stopped on the active line. At that time, the number of winning combinations that can be won is two (bells 02 and 03). Therefore, in the priority of the number, the “replay” symbol is stopped on the active line.

Since “replay” of the left reel 31 is “PB = 1”, it can always be stopped regardless of the operation timing of the left stop switch 42.
Further, when “replay” is stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped, the bells 01, 26, and 27 whose symbols on the left reel 31 are not “replay” are determined to be non-winning at that time.

Next, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which “watermelon A” related to the bell 02 or “black BAR” related to the bell 03 can be stopped on the effective line, Stop “Watermelon A” or “Black BAR”.
Here, as shown in FIG. 14, in the middle reel 31, “Watermelon A” or “Black BAR”, which is a symbol related to the bell 02 or the bell 03, is arranged at the 17th and 18th.
For example, in order to stop No. 17 “Black BAR” on the active line, it is necessary to operate the middle stop switch 42 at the moment when the symbols No. 13 to No. 17 pass the active line.

  Similarly, in order to stop No. 18 “Watermelon A” on the effective line, it is necessary to operate the middle stop switch 42 at the moment when the symbols No. 14 to No. 18 pass the effective line. Therefore, when the composite bell A1 is elected forward (when the push order is incorrect), “PB = 1” for the left reel 31, but “PB ≠ 1” for the middle reel 31.

  When the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the symbol No. 13 passes the effective line, only the “Black BAR” No. 17 can be stopped on the effective line, and the symbol No. 18 can be activated. When the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the moment of passing, only the 18th “watermelon A” can be stopped on the active line. On the other hand, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the symbols No. 14 to No. 17 pass the effective line, both “Black BAR” and “Watermelon A” can be stopped on the effective line.

  On the other hand, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing other than the timing at which the 17th “black BAR” or the 18th “watermelon A” can be stopped on the active line, the 17th “black BAR” or 18th Since “watermelon A” cannot be stopped at the active line, the non-winning of the bell 02 or the bell 03 is determined at that time.

  Further, the symbol related to the right reel 31 of the bell 02 or the bell 03 is “red 7”, which is arranged at the number 12 position. In order to stop “Red 7” of No. 12 on the effective line in the right reel 31, it is necessary to operate the right stop switch 42 at the moment when the symbols No. 08 to No. 12 pass the effective line. On the other hand, when the right stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the 12th “red 7” cannot be stopped on the active line, the bell 02 or the bell 03 is not won at that time.

  On the other hand, when “watermelon A” or “black BAR” is stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, but “red 7” cannot be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the right reel 31 is stopped. When stopping, the “bell” is stopped on the active line (middle). In the right reel 31, the “bells” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less, and can always be stopped at the effective line.

  In addition, after stopping “Replay” on the active line when the left reel 31 is stopped, when neither “Watermelon A” nor “Black BAR” can be stopped on the active line at the second stop, Any symbol may be stopped on the active line on the condition that the combination of symbols of the other role does not stop on the active line.

For example, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “bell” is stopped at the effective line (middle stage).
On the other hand, in this case, when the middle reel 31 stops, the winning combination of the winning combination relating to the composite bell A1 is confirmed. Accordingly, when the right reel 31 is stopped, any symbol may be stopped on the effective line as long as the combination of symbols of other roles is not stopped on the effective line. For example, “Replay” may be stopped in the middle stage. Can be mentioned. Since the “replay” of the right reel 31 has the symbol arrangement of “PB = 1”, it can always be stopped. As a result, in the case of winning the combined bell A1, the winning combination when both the middle and right reels 31 are missed is “replay” − “bell” − “replay”. Then, this symbol combination may be used as a result of missing one bell at the time of winning the composite bell.

  When the composite bell A1 is won, the left, middle and right are pushed in order. When the middle reel 31 is stopped and the winning combination is confirmed, for example, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the composite bell A1 is won. When the symbol “Red 7” related to Bell 02 or 03 can be stopped on the active line, “Red 7” may be stopped.

When the combination switch A1 is selected, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of left and right in the middle (order pinch), the same stop control as that in the above-mentioned order of pushing the left middle right is applied to the middle and right reels 31. Against.
On the other hand, at the time of winning the composite bell A1, “middle left and right”, which is the correct pressing order, is notified during AT, and the first left stop is determined during non-AT. Therefore, in general, in the non-AT, the pressing order of “middle right left” or “right first stop” is not assumed. However, when such a pressing order occurs due to an operation error of the stop switch 42 of the player, the following control is performed.

  First, when the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is “middle right left”, the middle first stop is the correct answer in the pushing order at that time. Stop "Bell". Next, when it is the right second stop, the push order is incorrect at this point. If the answer is incorrect, the right reel 31 is stopped by switching to number priority. If the “bell” is stopped at the middle stage when the right reel 31 is stopped, the winning combination with the possibility of winning at that time is the bell 01 (one piece), but if “replay” is stopped at the middle stage, The winning combination with the possibility of winning is Bell 26 or Bell 27 (two). Therefore, the winning of the bell 26 or the bell 27 is given priority, and the “replay” is stopped at the middle stage.

When the last left reel 31 is stopped, the “watermelon A” related to the bell 26 or the “blank” related to the bell 27 is stopped on the effective line.
Here, as shown in FIG. 14, in the left reel 31, either “watermelon A” or “blank” is arranged at intervals within 5 symbols. Therefore, in the left reel 31, either symbol related to the bell 26 or the bell 27 has an arrangement of “PB = 1”.

As described above, the bell 26 or the bell 27 can always be awarded in the middle right / left push order. However, since both the bell 26 and the bell 27 are paid out, the player receives less profit than the winning of the bell 01.
If the stop switch 42 is operated in the middle right / left push order when the composite bell A1 is won during non-AT, a penalty is incurred.

  Next, when the combination bell A1 is selected, if the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is “first right stop”, the answer is incorrect when the first right stop is reached. Since the push order is incorrect, the reels 31 are controlled to stop with priority on the number. Here, if “red 7” is stopped in the middle when the right reel 31 is stopped, the number of bells that may be won is two, bell 02 or bell 03. If “replay” is stopped, the possibility of winning is awarded. There will be two bells 26 or 27. As described above, when the number of winning combinations having the same winning possibility is the same when the number is prioritized, any of these may be prioritized, and it may be determined in advance. If the bell 02 or the bell 03 is prioritized, the reels 31 are controlled to stop as in the first left stop.

  On the other hand, if the bell 26 or the bell 27 is prioritized, “replay” (“PB = 1” in the right reel 31) is stopped at the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped. When the left reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon A” or “blank” is stopped on the effective line, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “bell” is stopped on the effective line. As a result, at the time of the first right stop, the stop control is the same as that in the above-described middle right-left pressing order, and the bell 26 or the bell 27 wins with “PB = 1”.

Next, the case of winning the composite bell A2 will be described. In the composite bell A2, the correct answer pressing order is “middle left and right”. Therefore, in the middle first stop, the first stop switch 42 is pressed in the correct order, and the reel control means 64 stops the “bell” on the active line.
Next, in the second left stop, the pushing order of the second stop switch 42 is also correct, so the reel control means 64 stops the “bell” on the active line.
At the time of the last right third stop, the “bell” is stopped on the active line in the same manner as the left and middle reels 31. As a result, the combination of the symbols of the bell 01 is stopped on the active line. Therefore, the stop control of each reel 31 is the same as when the composite bell A1 is won.

On the other hand, when the combination bell A2 is won and the answer is incorrect, the bell 04 or the bell 05 is controlled so as to be able to win a prize by giving priority to the number at the first stop on the left.
In the first left stop, the “bell” of the left reel 31 is a symbol related to the bell 01. On the other hand, the “replay” of the left reel 31 is a symbol related to the bell 04 and the bell 05. Therefore, when the “bell” is stopped on the active line when the left reel 31 is stopped, the number of winning combinations that can be won is one (bell 01), and when “replay” is stopped on the effective line, the winning combination that can be won is achieved. The number is two (bell 04 and bell 05). Therefore, in the priority of the number, “replay” is stopped at the effective line.
Further, if “replay” is stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped, the bells 01, 26 and 27 whose symbols on the left reel 31 are not “bell” are determined to be non-winning at that time.

Next, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which “red 7” related to the bell 04 or “cherry” related to the bell 05 can be stopped on the active line, the “red” 7 ”or“ Cherry ”is stopped.
Here, as shown in FIG. 14, in the middle reel 31, “red 7” and “cherry”, which are the symbols related to the bell 04 or the bell 05, are arranged at the 12th and 11th, respectively.

  In order to stop “Red 7” or “Cherry” on the active line, it is necessary to operate the middle stop switch 42 at the moment when the symbols No. 07 to No. 12 pass the active line. Therefore, when the composite bell A2 is elected forward (when the push order is incorrect), “PB = 1” for the left reel 31, but “PB ≠ 1” for the middle reel 31.

  In addition, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the 07th symbol passes through the active line, only the 11th "cherry" can stop at the active line, and the 12th symbol passes through the active line. When the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the moment of making, only the 12th “red 7” can be stopped on the active line. On the other hand, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the symbols No. 08 to No. 11 pass through the effective line, both “Cherry” and “Red 7” can be stopped on the effective line.

  For the last right reel 31, as in the case of winning the composite bell A1, when the right stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which “red 7” can be stopped on the active line, “red 7” is stopped on the active line. However, when the right stop switch 42 is operated at other timings, “Red 7” cannot be stopped at the active line.

When “red 7” or “cherry” cannot be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, and when “red 7” cannot be stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the composite bell In the same way as when the A1 winner is missed, it is only necessary to stop the symbols on the active line so that no other winning combination is won.
Even in the middle of the left and right (when sandwiched in order), the stop control of each reel 31 is performed in the same manner as in the middle left and right (when pushed forward).
Further, when the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is “middle right / left” or “right first stop”, the same operation as that in the above-described combination bell A1 winning is performed.

  When the composite bell A3 is won, the stop control at the correct answer in the pressing order is the same as that of the composite bell A1. Also, at the time of the first stop at the left when the pressing order is incorrect, the bell 06 or the bell 07 is controlled to be awarded by giving priority to the number as in the case of the composite bell A1 winning. Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the left, “Replay” is stopped on the active line with the number priority.

Next, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which “blue 7” relating to the bell 06 or “white BAR” relating to the bell 07 can be stopped on the effective line, Stop “Blue 7” or “White BAR”.
Here, as shown in FIG. 14, in the middle reel 31, “Blue 7” and “White BAR”, which are the symbols related to Bell 06 or Bell 07, are arranged at No. 06 and 03, respectively.

  In order to stop “Blue 7” or “White BAR” on the active line, the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the symbols of No. 19 to No. 20 or No. 01 to 06 pass the active line. There is a need. Therefore, when the composite bell A3 is elected forward (when the push order is incorrect), “PB = 1” for the left reel 31, but “PB ≠ 1” for the middle reel 31.

  In addition, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the symbols No. 19 to No. 20 and No. 01 pass the effective line, only the No. 03 “white BAR” can be stopped, and the Nos. 04 to 06 can be stopped. When the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the symbol of the number passes through the active line, only the “blue 7” of the number 06 can be stopped. When the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the 02 or 03 symbol passes through the active line, both the 03 “white BAR” and 06 “blue 7” symbols stop on the active line. Is possible.

  For the last right reel 31, as in the case of winning the composite bell A1, when the right stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which “red 7” can be stopped on the active line, “red 7” is stopped on the active line. However, when the right stop switch 42 is operated at other timings, “Red 7” cannot be stopped at the active line.

When “blue 7” or “white BAR” cannot be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, and when “red 7” cannot be stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped In the same way as when the bell A1 is won, it is only necessary to stop symbols on the active line so that no other winning combination is won.
Even in the middle of the left and right (when sandwiched in order), the stop control of each reel 31 is performed in the same manner as in the middle left and right (when pushed forward).
Further, when the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is “middle right / left” or “right first stop”, the same operation as that in the above-described combination bell A1 winning is performed.

When the composite bell B1 is won, the correct answer push order is middle right and left. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct push order when the composite bell B1 is won, the control is performed so that the bell 01 is won in the same manner as the composite bell A1. To do.
Also, at the time of the first left stop when the push order is incorrect, as in the case of the composite bell A1 winning, the number 08 is given priority to control the bell 08 or the bell 09 so that a winning can be achieved. Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the left, “Replay” is stopped on the active line with the number priority.

  Next, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the “watermelon A” relating to the bell 08 or the “black BAR” relating to the bell 09 can be stopped on the effective line, Stop “Watermelon A” or “Black BAR”. The stop control of the reel 31 at this time is the same as when the composite bell A1 is won.

  For the last right reel 31, the design related to Bell 08 or 09 is “Blue 7”, so in FIG. 14, the right stop switch 42 is turned on at the timing when “Blue 7” of No. 07 can be stopped on the active line. When operated, “blue 7” is stopped on the active line, but when the right stop switch 42 is operated at other timings, “blue 7” cannot be stopped on the active line.

Even in the middle of the left and right (when sandwiched in order), the stop control of each reel 31 is performed in the same manner as in the middle left and right (when pushed forward).
When “watermelon A” or “black BAR” cannot be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, and when “blue 7” cannot be stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped Similar to the case of missing the combined bell, it is only necessary to stop the symbols that are not won by other roles on the active line.

  Further, when the combination bell B1 is selected and the stop switch 42 is pressed in the “middle left and right” direction, the middle first stop is the correct answer in the pushing order at that time. Stop "Bell". Next, if it is the second left stop, the push order is incorrect at this point. When the pressing order is incorrect, the left reel 31 is stopped by switching to the number priority. That is, control is performed so that the winning of the bell 28 or the bell 29 is given priority. As a result, the winning of the bell 28 or the bell 29 is prioritized over the bell 01. Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon A” (PB = 1 in the left reel 31) is stopped on the active line.

Further, for the last right reel 31, “cherry” or “blank” is stopped on the active line. As shown in FIG. 14, in the right reel 31, either “cherry” or “blank” is arranged at an interval within 5 symbols. Accordingly, in the right reel 31, any symbol related to the bell 28 or the bell 29 has an arrangement of “PB = 1”.
As described above, the bell 28 or the bell 29 can always be awarded in the middle / left / right pushing order when the composite bell B1 is won. However, since both the bell 28 and the bell 29 are paid out, the player receives less profit than the winning of the bell 01.

  Furthermore, when the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is “first right stop”, the pressing order is incorrect at the first right stop. Accordingly, at the time of the first stop on the right, the reels 31 are controlled so as to give priority to the number, so that “blue 7” (bell 08 or bell 09) or “cherry” or “blank” (bell 28 or bell 29) is stopped. .

When “blue 7” is stopped at the right first stop, when “watermelon A” or “black BAR” can be stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped, any of these symbols is stopped.
Further, when “Cherry” or “Blank” is stopped at the right first stop, “Bell” (PB = 1) is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped.

  The stop control at the time of winning the composite bell B2 replaces the bell 08 or the bell 09 with the bell 10 or the bell 11, and the symbol of the middle reel 31 is changed from "Watermelon A" or "Black BAR". Corresponds to “Red 7” or “Cherry”. The stop control of “red 7” or “cherry” of the middle reel 31 is the same as when the composite bell A2 is won.

  Further, the stop control at the time of winning the composite bell B3 replaces the bell 08 or the bell 09 with the bell 12 or the bell 13 as compared with the above-mentioned winning of the composite bell B1, and the symbol of the middle reel 31 is “watermelon A” or “black BAR”. To “blue 7” or “white BAR”. The stop control of “blue 7” or “white BAR” of the middle reel 31 is the same as when the composite bell A3 is won.

When the composite bell C1 is won, the correct answer pressing order is in the middle left and right. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order when the composite bell C1 is selected, the control is performed so that the bell 01 is won in the same manner as the composite bell A1. To do.
In addition, at the time of the first stop at the left when the pressing order is incorrect, the bell 14 or the bell 15 is controlled so as to be awarded by giving priority to the number as in the case of the composite bell A1 winning. Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the left, “Replay” is stopped on the active line with the number priority.

  Next, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which “watermelon A” related to the bell 14 or “black BAR” related to the bell 15 can be stopped on the effective line, “ Stop “Watermelon A” or “Black BAR”. The stop control of the reel 31 at this time is the same as when the composite bell A1 is won.

For the last right reel 31, the symbol related to the bell 14 or the bell 15 is “black BAR”. Therefore, in FIG. When operated, the “black BAR” is stopped at the effective line, but when the right stop switch 42 is operated at other timings, the “black BAR” cannot be stopped at the effective line.
Even in the middle of the left and right (when sandwiched in order), the stop control of each reel 31 is performed in the same manner as in the middle left and right (when pushed forward).

  When “watermelon A” or “black BAR” cannot be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, and when “black BAR” cannot be stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped Similar to the case of missing the combined bell, it is only necessary to stop the symbols that are not won by other roles on the active line.

  In addition, when the combination bell C1 is selected and the stop switch 42 is pressed in the middle right, the right first stop is the correct answer in the pressing order at that time. Stop "Bell". Next, in the middle second stop, the push order is incorrect at this point. When the pressing order is incorrect, the middle reel 31 is stopped by switching to the number priority. That is, control is performed so that the winning of the bell 30 or the bell 31 is given priority. Thus, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, “replay” (PB = 1 for the middle reel 31) is stopped at the effective line.

For the last left reel 31, "watermelon A" or "blank"("PB = 1" in total) is stopped at the active line.
From the above, it is possible to always win the bell 30 or the bell 31 in the right middle left push order when the composite bell C1 is won. However, since either the bell 30 or the bell 31 is paid out, the player receives less profit than the winning of the bell 01.

Furthermore, when the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is “medium first stop”, the push order is incorrect at the middle first stop point. Therefore, at the time of the middle stop, the reel 31 is controlled to stop with priority on the number, but when either “Watermelon A” or “Black BAR” is stopped, the bell that may be won at the time of the stop is 1 However, if the “replay” is stopped, there are two bells 30 or 31 that are likely to win. Therefore, due to the number priority, “replay” (“PB = 1”) is stopped during the middle first stop.
When the left reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon A” or “blank” (totally “PB = 1”) is stopped on the effective line, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, “bell” (“PB = 1”) is enabled. Stop on line.

  The stop control at the time of winning the composite bell C2 replaces the bell 14 or the bell 15 with the bell 16 or the bell 17, and the symbol of the middle reel 31 from "Watermelon A" or "Black BAR". Corresponds to “Red 7” or “Cherry”. The stop control of “red 7” or “cherry” of the middle reel 31 is the same as when the composite bell A2 is won.

  Further, the stop control at the time of winning the composite bell C3 is that the bell 14 or the bell 15 is replaced with the bell 18 or 19 and the symbol of the middle reel 31 is changed to “watermelon A” or “black BAR”. To “blue 7” or “white BAR”. The stop control of “blue 7” or “white BAR” of the middle reel 31 is the same as when the composite bell A3 is won.

The correct answer push order when winning the composite bell D1 is right middle left, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct push order when winning the composite bell D1, the control is performed so that the bell 01 is won in the same manner as the composite bell A1. To do.
Further, at the time of the first stop at the left when the push order is incorrect, the bell 20 or the bell 21 is controlled so as to be awarded by giving priority to the number as in the case of the composite bell A1 winning. Therefore, at the time of the first stop on the left, “Replay” is stopped on the active line with the number priority.

  Next, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the “watermelon A” related to the bell 20 or the “black BAR” related to the bell 21 can be stopped on the effective line, Stop “Watermelon A” or “Black BAR”. The stop control of the reel 31 at this time is the same as when the composite bell A1 is won.

For the last right reel 31, the symbol related to the bell 20 or the bell 21 is “white BAR”. Therefore, in FIG. 14, the right stop switch 42 is turned on at the timing when the “white BAR” of No. 02 can be stopped on the active line. When operated, the “white BAR” is stopped at the effective line, but when the right stop switch 42 is operated at other timings, the “white BAR” cannot be stopped at the effective line.
Even in the middle of the left and right (when sandwiched in order), the stop control of each reel 31 is performed in the same manner as in the middle left and right (when pushed forward).

  When “watermelon A” or “black BAR” cannot be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, and when “white BAR” cannot be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped Similar to the case of missing the combined bell, it is only necessary to stop the symbols that are not won by other roles on the active line.

  Further, when the composite bell D1 is selected and the stop switch 42 is pressed in the “middle right”, the right first stop is the correct answer in the pressing order at that time. Stop "Bell". Next, if it is the second left stop, the push order is incorrect at this point. When the pressing order is incorrect, the left reel 31 is stopped by switching to the number priority. That is, control is performed so that the winning of the bell 32 or the bell 33 is prioritized. Thus, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon A” (PB = 1 in the left reel 31) is stopped on the effective line.

For the last middle reel 31, "watermelon B" or "blank"("PB = 1" in total) is stopped at the active line.
From the above, it is possible to always win the bell 32 or the bell 33 in the order of pressing the middle left and right (in the case of incorrect answer) when the composite bell D1 is won. However, since both the bell 32 and the bell 33 are paid out, the player receives less profit than the winning of the bell 01.

  Furthermore, when the composite bell D1 is selected, if the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is “medium first stop”, the answer is incorrect at the time of the middle first stop. Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop, the reel 31 is controlled to stop with the number priority, but “watermelon A” (bell 20), “black BAR” (bell 21), “watermelon B” (bell 32), or “blank”. "(Bell 33) no matter which one is stopped, at the time of the stop, there is only one winning combination having the possibility of winning.

In such a case, which may be prioritized and which is prioritized may be determined in advance. For example, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated immediately before the “watermelon B” of No. 16 passes the effective line at the middle first stop, “watermelon B (16)”, “black BAR (17)” "Or" Watermelon A (No. 18) "can be stopped on the active line.
Here, if the bell 20 or the bell 21 is prioritized and either the “watermelon A” or the “black BAR” is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the left reel 31 is “PB = 1”, the right The reel 31 is “PB ≠ 1”.

  On the other hand, if priority is given to the bell 32 or the bell 33, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "watermelon B" or "blank" ("PB = 1" in total) is stopped on the effective line. When the left reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon A” (“PB = 1”) is stopped on the effective line, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, “bell” (“PB = 1”) is stopped on the effective line.

  The stop control at the time of winning the composite bell D2 is that the bell 20 or the bell 21 is replaced with the bell 22 or the bell 23, and the symbol of the middle reel 31 is changed from “Watermelon A” or “Black BAR”. Corresponds to “Red 7” or “Cherry”. The stop control of “red 7” or “cherry” of the middle reel 31 is the same as when the composite bell A2 is won.

  Further, the stop control at the time of winning the composite bell D3 is that the bell 20 or the bell 21 is replaced with the bell 24 or the bell 25 and the symbol of the middle reel 31 is “watermelon A” or “black BAR”. To “blue 7” or “white BAR”. The stop control of “blue 7” or “white BAR” of the middle reel 31 is the same as when the composite bell A3 is won.

The middle cherry table is used when the middle cherry is won, and when the left reel 31 is stopped, the combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped is determined so that “cherry” is stopped at the effective line (middle stage). It is a thing.
The symbol “cherry” on the left reel 31 is “PB ≠ 1”.
In the middle cherry table, there are no particular restrictions on the symbols when the middle and right reels 31 are stopped. For example, “red 7”, “blue 7”, “black BAR”, “white BAR”, Control is performed so that the “replay” alignment, the “bell” alignment, and the “watermelon (A, B)” alignment do not stop on a straight line.

The corner cherry table is used when the corner cherry is won, and the combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped is determined so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the corner cherry is stopped on the effective line. is there.
Here, when the black cherry “black BAR / red 7 / blue 7”-“cherry”-“black BAR / red 7 / blue 7” stops at the active line, “lower” — “middle” — “upper” The “cherry”-“cherry”-“cherry”, so-called triple cherry, stops at the invalid line (upward to the right). The symbol arrangement of each reel 31 of the square cherry is “PB ≠ 1”.

Furthermore, the watermelon table is used when a watermelon is won, and the reel is set to stop “watermelon A” for the left reel 31 and “watermelon B” for the middle and right reels 31 at the effective line. 31 is a combination of symbols at the time of stopping.
The symbol “watermelon A” on the left reel 31 has a “PB = 1” arrangement, and the symbol “watermelon B” on the middle and right reel 31 has a “PB ≠ 1” arrangement.

Next, a stop position determination table related to replay will be described.
First, the normal replay table is used when normal replay is won, and within the range of the reel 31 stop control, the normal replay is won and the reels 31 are not awarded any role other than the normal replay. The combination of symbols at the time of stopping is determined.

As shown in FIG. 14, in all reels 31, “replay” symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less. Therefore, with respect to the normal replay, the normal replay can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (PB = 1).
For both non-internal and internal games, when normal replay is won, normal replay wins with “PB = 1”.

  The bell replay 1 table is used when the bell replay 1 is won, and the reel replay 1 is awarded within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 so that a role other than the bell replay 1 is not won. 31 is a combination of symbols at the time of stopping. As shown in FIG. 17, the symbol combination of the bell replay 1 is “replay” − “watermelon A / watermelon B / white BAR” − “replay”. Here, “replay” of the left and right reels 31 has a symbol arrangement of “PB = 1” as described above.

For the middle reel 31, any one of “watermelon A”, “watermelon B”, or “white BAR” is arranged at an interval within 5 symbols. As a result, the sum of these three symbols is “PB = 1”. Therefore, when winning the bell replay 1, the bell replay 1 wins with “PB = 1”.
Further, as described above, when the bell replay 1 is won, “bells” are aligned with the “upper”-“upper”-“upper” invalid line.

  Further, the bell replay 2 table is used when the win of the bell replay 2 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the bell replay 2 is won and no role other than the bell replay 2 is won. The combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped is determined. The combination of symbols of Bell Replay 2 is “Replay” − “Bell” − “Watermelon A / Watermelon B” as shown in FIG. Here, the “replay” of the left reel 31 and the “bell” of the middle reel 31 have the symbol arrangement of “PB = 1” as described above.

For the right reel 31, either “Watermelon A” or “Watermelon B” is arranged at an interval within 5 symbols. As a result, the sum of these two symbols is “PB = 1”. Therefore, when winning the bell replay 2, the bell replay 2 wins with “PB = 1”.
Further, as described above, when the bell replay 2 is won, the “bell” is aligned with the invalid line of “upper stage” − “middle stage” − “lower stage”.

  The replay duplication table is used when both normal replay and special replay are won. When the stop switch 42 is pressed first right within the range of stop control of the reel 31, the special replay is awarded. The combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped is determined so that the normal replay is won in the pressing order of the left or middle first stop.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when AT is started, it waits for a replay overlap win, and in the game that is a replay overlap win, the stop switch 42 should be operated in the order of right middle left push and “Red 7”. Inform the player that the symbol should be aimed.
Here, aiming at “Red 7” of No. 12 at the first stop on the right, aiming at “Red 7” of No. 12 at the second stop of the middle, and aiming at “Red 7” of No. 13 at the third stop of the left, Special replays with “Red 7” aligned on the active line stop. On the other hand, if “red 7” cannot be stopped when the right and middle reels 31 are stopped in the pressing order of the right first stop and the middle second stop, “replay” is stopped. Furthermore, in the pressing order of the right first stop, if “red 7” cannot be stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped, “bell” is stopped.

On the other hand, each reel 31 is stopped using the normal replay table in the pressing order that is the left or middle first stop.
In the case of the right first stop push order, even if the player misses the “Red 7” alignment, the special replay pattern is “PB = 1” on all reels 31. Because there is, special replay always wins when winning special replay.

When the winning of MB is carried over (inside the inside), if any winning combination or replay is won, the reel 31 is controlled to stop using the following stop position determination table.
First, at the time of replay winning in the internal game, a stop position determination table giving priority to replay winning is used. Since the replay always wins as described above (PB = 1), when the replay is won in the internal game, there is no case where the MB that has won the win wins.

In addition, when winning a combined bell in an internal game, priority is given to the winning of the bell, and when the bell cannot be won, a stop position determination table for winning the MB having the winning is used.
First, in an internal game, a stop position determination table that always wins the bell 01 is used at the time of correct answer in pushing order when the composite bell is won. Therefore, when the complex bell is won and the correct answer is correct in the internal game, Bell 01 always wins with “PB = 1”, and there is no case where the MB that has won the prize wins.

Also, in the game in the middle, when an incorrect answer is made when the composite bell is won (first stop left), priority is given to winning one bell, and MB does not win.
As described above, “replay” is always stopped at the middle stage when the first stop is left at the wrong answer in pushing order when the composite bell is won. On the other hand, since the symbol of the left reel 31 of the MB is “blank”, the MB non-winning is determined at the first left stop. Therefore, in the MB inside game, the MB does not win even if the push order is incorrect when the composite bell is won and the bell is missed.

  For the bell 29, the design of the right reel 31 is the same “blank” as MB. And, when winning the composite bells B1 to B3, winning of the bell 29 is included. For this reason, at the time of winning one of the composite bells B1 to B3, the “blank” of the right reel 31 may stop at the active line when the right first stop is performed (when the pushing order is incorrect). However, since “watermelon A” of the left reel 31 and “bell” of the middle reel 31 are both arranged with “PB = 1”, the bell 29 always stops at the effective line. Therefore, there is no case where MB wins.

  Further, when the composite bells D1 to D3 are elected, the “blank” of the bell 33 may be stopped during the middle first stop (when the push order is incorrect). However, since “watermelon A” on the left reel 31 and “bell” on the right reel 31 are both arranged with “PB = 1”, the bell 33 always wins. Therefore, MB does not win in this case.

  The MB game table is used when no lottery of a role is performed during MB game, or when a role (for example, replay) is lottery, when the role is not won. The winning position of the small role is turned on, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the small roles is stopped on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. .

In the present embodiment, stop control is performed within 75 ms (the maximum number of moving frames is 1 frame) for the left reel 31, and stop control is performed for 190 ms (within 4 frames) for the middle and right reels 31.
Furthermore, during the MB game, any small combination may be controlled to win, but in the present embodiment, control is performed so that the bell 01 is won.

  The non-winning table is used when all winning flags are off, and defines the combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped so that the symbol combinations corresponding to any combination do not stop on the active line. is there.

  In FIG. 4, the winning determination means 62d of the main CPU 62 determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination has stopped on the active line when all the reels 31 are stopped. The winning determination means 62d determines the symbol on the effective line by detecting the number of steps of the motor 32 after the reel sensor 39 detects the index, for example. However, the winning determination means 62d can determine the stop symbol regardless of whether or not the reel 31 is stopped when the stop switch 42 is operated and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined.

  When all the reels 31 are stopped, the payout means 62e determines that the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations has stopped on the active line, and when the winning combination of the winning combination is determined according to the winning combination. Pay out the number of medals to the player. As described above, the payout is added as the stored number, or when the stored number exceeds “50”, the medal is actually paid out from the payout port 14. When actually paying out medals, the hopper motor 36 is driven and controlled to pay out a predetermined number of medals. At the time of paying out medals, the payout medals are detected by the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and it is checked whether or not they have been paid out correctly.

  The command control means 62 f is a means for transmitting various commands (information) from the main control board 60 to the first sub control board 80. Information to be transmitted includes information indicating that the setting change process has been started, information indicating that the setting change process has been completed, information indicating that an error (error) has occurred, information indicating that a medal has been inserted, and start Information that the switch 41 has been operated, information on the lottery result (winning combination), information that the reel 31 has started rotating, information that the stop switch 42 has been operated, information that the reel 31 has stopped Information on the stop position of each reel 31 (design stopped on the active line), information on winning combination, information on paying out medals, information on gaming status (non-inside, inside, MB game), information on freeze, etc. Is mentioned.

In FIG. 4, the main control board 60 is electrically connected to the external concentration terminal board 100. When the main CPU 62 determines to execute AT, the main CPU 62 transmits an outer end signal (AT execution signal) to the external concentrated terminal board 100. The outer end signal is transmitted from, for example, the external concentrated terminal board 100 to a hall game information display device provided on the slot machine 10, a hall computer, or the like.
The outer end signal is output from the output port 6 (FIG. 13) as described above.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 62 transmits an outer end signal at the start of AT, that is, at the time of winning a special replay. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the outer end signal may be transmitted at any timing from the time when the AT is won until the end of the AT. For example, when AT is elected (when winning a rare role and elected by AT lottery), during a precursor, at the end of a precursor, at the start of AT preparation, at the beginning of AT's first game, etc. It is done.

  Further, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of three correct consecutive pushes when the composite bell is won, it can be determined that AT is in progress and an outer end signal (signal at the start of AT) can be transmitted. Furthermore, when the composite bell is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of three consecutive incorrect presses, it is determined that the AT has ended, and an outer end signal (signal at the end of the AT) can be transmitted.

  As described above, at the start of the game, the player operates the bet switch 40 to insert a previously stored medal, or inserts a medal from the medal insertion slot 43 and operates the start switch 41 (ON). ) When the start switch 41 is operated, the reel control means 62c controls to drive all the motors 32 and rotate all the reels 31. As the reel 31 is rotated by the motor 32 in this way, the symbols on the reel 31 are moved and displayed in the vertical direction in the display window 13 at a predetermined speed. When the start switch 41 is operated, the part lottery means 62b performs a part lottery.

  Then, the player presses the stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 62c drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42, and performs stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32.

  Then, the game result of the game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the active line (when the winning combination of the winning combination), a medal corresponding to the winning combination is paid out.

  In FIG. 4, the sub control board includes a first sub control board 80 and a second sub control board 90 in the present embodiment. The sub-control board controls selection or output of effects (information) during the game and during the game standby.

The first sub control board 80 and the second sub control board 90 are control boards belonging to the lower level of the main control board 60. The main control board 60 and the first sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the serial communication circuit in the main CPU 62 of the main control board 60 produces an effect on the first sub control board 80 in one direction. Necessary information (signal, data, control command, etc.) is transmitted.
The main control board 60 and the first sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to serial communication, and may be parallel communication.

Further, the first sub control board 80 and the second sub control board 90 include a first sub CPU 82 provided in the first sub control board 80 and a second sub CPU 92 provided in the second sub control board 90. Two-way communication is performed by serial communication circuits provided respectively. That is, necessary information is transmitted from the first sub-control board 80 to the second sub-control board 90, and the second sub-control board 90 sends necessary information (checksum etc.) to the first sub-control board 80. ).
Note that the connection between the first sub-control board 80 and the second sub-control board 90 is not limited to electrical connection, and may be optical communication connection as described above. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to serial communication, and may be parallel communication.

  The presentation peripheral devices (the push button 83 and the cross key 84) connected to the first sub control board 80 are electrically connected via an input port or an output port (not shown in FIG. 4). Yes. The method of using the push button 83 and the cross key 84 will be described later, but is used when displaying information intended by the player or when changing the various settings by the hall manager (store manager, etc.).

Similarly to the main control board 60, the first sub control board 80 includes an RWM 81 and a first sub CPU 82.
The RWM (sub main memory) 81 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data and the like captured when the first sub CPU 82 controls the effect.
The ROM (sub-main ROM) is a storage medium for storing programs, various data, and the like used when performing an AT (including sub-bonus) lottery as performance data.
As described above, the MPU including the first sub CPU 82, the RWM, and the ROM is mounted on the first sub control board 80. Further, the RWM is mounted outside the MPU (on the first sub-control board 80) separately from the RWM built in the MPU. The term RWM 81 is used to include an MPU built-in RWM, an external RWM, and a ROM.

The first sub-control board 80 outputs at what timing (when the start switch 41 is operated, when each stop switch 42 is operated, etc.) according to the winning combination, gaming state, etc. It is determined by lottery how the lamp 21 is turned on, blinked, or turned off, what kind of sound is output from the speaker 22, what kind of image is displayed on the image display device 23, and the like.
Then, the command control means 82 b of the first sub control board 80 transmits a command related to the determined effect content to the second sub control board 90.

The first sub CPU 82 includes AT control means 82a. The AT control means 82a executes a lottery regarding AT (sub bonus) and the like based on the number of games, winning combination and the like according to a predetermined program.
In the present embodiment, the sub-internal state controlled by the first sub-control board 80 includes non-AT, AT in preparation, and AT.

  Here, “AT” means that, depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, when a winning combination (including both single and overlapping) in which an advantage / disadvantage occurs in the game result of the game or the subsequent game is won, A game (notification game) for notifying the player of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is most advantageous to the player. In particular, the present embodiment is a game for notifying the correct answer push order (push order for eight payouts) when the above-described composite bell is won.

  During non-AT, the correct answer push order is not notified when the composite bell is won. Further, during non-AT, it is a left first stop instruction, and an irregular pressing (middle or right first stop) is a penalty. As a result, as long as the game is performed while observing the first stop at the left during non-AT, there is no case where the correct answer is pushed in the case of winning the composite bell. During non-AT, when the composite bell is won and when the right reel 31 is stopped, the operation timing at which the symbols constituting the combination of symbols related to the winning bell in the game can be stopped on the active line by chance. By operating the stop switch 42, it is possible to win a single bell.

Therefore, during the AT, it is possible to win the bell 01 which will be paid out when winning the combined bell, but during the non-AT, it is possible to win the bells 02 to 25 which will be paid out by chance. Only. Therefore, the expected value of the number of medals paid out is higher during AT than during non-AT.
Note that a game that notifies the correct pressing order of the stop switch 42, such as during an AT, does not result in a penalty even if an irregular pressing is performed according to the notification.

The non-AT has a low probability, a normal probability, and a high probability that the probability of winning the AT is different. Furthermore, if the AT is won during the low probability, the normal probability, and the high probability, the game shifts to a precursor that is a game period before the AT starts although the AT is won. During this sign, the player is informed that the AT has been won.
In addition, the period between the end of the warning and the start of AT (at the time of special replay winning) is AT preparation.
Furthermore, the AT has a normal probability and a high probability of different expected values on which the number of games of the AT is added. Here, the number of AT games (generally also referred to as “AT executable number”) refers to the number of games in the AT period, the number of payouts to be paid out during the AT period, the number of notifications to be notified when winning the composite bell (number of navigations) It also refers to the difference between the input number and the payout number.

The transition of these internal states is performed by a winning combination in the game. Further, the transition from one internal state to another internal state is performed at the end of the game in the one internal state (when all the reels 31 are stopped and the game result of the game is displayed).
In the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to a precursor among the internal states, it corresponds to winning of the AT.

  In the internal state, in a non-AT (excluding the award winning AT), a transition is made between a low probability, a normal probability, and a high probability. For example, when winning a medium cherry, winning a corner cherry, and winning a watermelon, an internal state that is advantageous to the player with a predetermined probability according to the internal state at the time of winning (for example, from a low probability to a normal probability) Migrate). In addition, at the time of replay winning, the state shifts to an internal state (for example, transition from high probability to low probability) that is disadvantageous to the player with a predetermined probability.

When the AT control means 82a decides to shift to the precursor in the AT lottery, the AT control means 82a determines the number of games of the precursor by lottery within the range of “1” to “32”, and sets the value in the counter. Then, the counter value is decremented by “1” every game, and when it becomes “0”, the sign is finished and the process proceeds to AT preparation.
In addition, once it shifts to a precursor, there is no case where it shifts from a precursor to a low probability, a normal probability, or a high probability. In addition, when winning AT or reaching the number of ceiling games, it is notified that the AT is confirmed at that time, and is preparing for AT without going through the precursor (set the number of games of the precursor to “0”) It is good.

At the end of the sign, an AT confirmation effect is displayed and waits until a replay overlap win is reached. Therefore, after the sign ends, the game until the replay overlap win is in AT preparation.
When winning a composite bell during AT preparation, the correct answer push order is notified. Then, when the replay overlap win is made, as described above, the reverse push is performed, and an effect indicating that “Red 7” should be aimed is output. In the game, a special replay always wins regardless of whether or not “Red 7” is aligned. When the special replay is won, an effect indicating that the AT is started is output, and the AT is started from the next game.
Note that the AT preparation is not required as in the present embodiment. For example, when the remaining number of games of the precursor is “0”, it is possible to start AT from the next game.
In addition, when the number of difference during AT preparation becomes excessive (for example, when AT is preparing and the winning of the composite bell continues without being replayed in duplicate), notification and non-notification are performed at the time of winning the composite bell. By repeating the above, it may be controlled to adjust the difference sheet number during AT preparation.

  Note that the AT control means 82a does not start the AT even if the player makes a special replay by winning a special replay in a non-AT that has not been won by AT (when there is no notification) and replay overlap is won. Also, a penalty period can be set from the next game.

There are various AT termination conditions after starting AT. For example,
(1) When the number of games reaches a predetermined number (for example, if the initial number of games is “50” and “N” is added to this “50”, then “50 + N”). When the number of sheets (the number of payouts minus the number of inserted sheets) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300 sheets) (3) When the number of composite bell wins (in the correct answer pressing order) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 40 times) Is mentioned.

  For example, when the AT end condition is determined by the number of games, the initial value of the AT is selected from a fixed case such as “50” or a lottery from “50”, “60” or “70”. There is a way. The timing for determining the initial number of AT games by lottery can be set in various ways, such as at the time of winning an AT, at the end of a sign, or at the start of an AT (at the time of special replay winning).

  During AT, the internal state has a normal probability and a high probability. For example, first, there is a method of always setting a normal probability at the start of AT, and a method of determining by lottery whether the initial internal state of AT is a normal probability or a high probability before starting AT. Can be mentioned.

In the present embodiment, when a cherry or watermelon that is a rare small role is won during an AT, an AT is added and a lottery is performed. The higher probability than the normal probability is set to have a higher probability of being added and the number of games is increased.
For example, the AT end condition is the number of games, and the initial value of the number of games is set to “50”. Then, at the time of winning the cherry or watermelon, whether or not to increase the number of games is determined by lottery. When the number of extra games is determined, a process of adding the extra number of games to the remaining number of games of the AT at that time is performed.

  In addition, when the special replay and the normal replay are overlapped, whether or not the push order in which the special replay wins is notified based on the gaming state of the first sub-control board 80 (in other words, “red 7” can be aligned) It is also possible to determine whether or not and add the number of games added in the game in which the push order in which the special replay wins is notified. In this case, it is possible to provide the slot machine 10 in which the number of added games is greatly dependent on the game state of the first sub-control board 80 rather than the result of the combination lottery.

In addition, the transition between the normal probability and the high probability during the AT can be performed by a lottery result that is performed separately from the result of the lottery or the lottery.
When the internal state is shifted based on the result of the lottery, for example, during normal probability, it is possible to shift to a high probability with 70% when winning the medium cherry, 20% when winning the corner cherry, and 40% when winning the watermelon. Can be mentioned.
In addition, during a high probability, it is possible to shift to the normal probability at 10% at the time of winning the replay.

  The first sub CPU 82 includes command control means 82b. As will be described later, the command control unit 82b transmits a control command, an authentication command, and the like necessary for image display and audio output to the second sub-control board 90 at a predetermined timing.

The second sub control board 90 is a control board belonging to a lower level than the first sub control board 80. The first sub control board 80 may be referred to as a sub main board, and the second sub control board 90 may be referred to as a sub sub control board.
Similarly to the first sub control board 80, the second sub control board 90 includes an RWM 91 and a second sub CPU 92.
The RWM (sub-sub memory) 91 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data and the like captured when the second sub CPU 92 outputs various effects.
The ROM (sub-sub ROM) is a storage medium for storing effect data (effect pattern or the like) output from the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23.

  Similar to the above, the MPU including the first sub CPU 92, the RWM, and the ROM is mounted on the second sub control board 90. Further, the RWM is mounted outside the MPU (on the second sub-control board 90) separately from the RWM built in the MPU. The term RWM 91 is used to include a RWM with a built-in MPU, an external RWM, and a ROM.

The second sub CPU 92 performs an effect according to a predetermined program.
Here, the second sub CPU 92 includes command control means 92a and output control means 92b.
The command control unit 92a receives a command transmitted from the first sub control board 80, and executes predetermined processing, for example, transmitting a checksum to the first sub control board 80 based on the received command.
Further, the output control unit 92b selects an effect based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control board 80, and performs control so that various effects are output from the peripheral device for the effect.

In addition, to the output port (not shown in FIG. 4) of the second sub-control board 90, the effect peripheral devices such as the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 are electrically connected.
The effect lamp 21 is made of an LED, for example, and lights up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Note that the effect lamp 21 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31, and a back lamp and reel 31 for illuminating from behind the symbols displayed on the reels 31 (three symbols that are continuously visible from the display window 11). Fluorescent lamps that illuminate the symbols on the reel 31 from above, a frame lamp 21 (see FIG. 1) that is arranged on the front surface of the front cover 11 of the slot machine 10 and blinks when winning a winning combination.

The speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, and the like, and displays various effect images (effect images during freeze, push order during AT, and lottery results of roles during the game). Corresponding production etc.), game information (number of games during AT, number of games acquired, etc.), etc. are displayed.
The arrangement of the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 in the slot machine 10 is as described with reference to FIG.

Next, information processing by the main control board 60 (main CPU 62) will be described based on a flowchart.
Information processing by the main control board 60 described in the present embodiment is shown in FIGS. The processing outline of each figure is shown below.
Figure 20: Program start (M_PRG_START)
Figure 21: Setting change process (M_RANK_SET)
Figure 22: Control command set 1 (S_CMD_SET)
Figure 23: Control command set 2 (SS_CMD_SET)
Figure 24: Power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON)
Figure 25: Unrecoverable error handling (SS_ERROR_STOP)
Figure 26: Main loop (M_MAIN)
Figure 27: Game start set (MS_GAME_SET)
Figure 28: Game state set (MS_ACTION_SET)
Figure 29: Game status output (MS_STATUS_SET)
Fig. 30: Reading stored number (S_CREDIT_READ)
Figure 31: Blocker on (MS_BLOCKER_ON)
Figure 32: Adding one medal (MS_MEDAL_INC)
Figure 33: Reading medals (S_PLAYM_READ)
Figure 34: Set medal limit number (MS_MMAX_SET)
Figure 35: Medal waiting (MS_STANDBY_DSP)
Figure 36; Medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK)
Fig. 37 and Fig. 38; Checks when cleaning medals (MS_INSERT_CHK)
Figure 39: Blocker off (MS_BLOCKER_OFF)
Figure 40: Addition of one stored number (MS_CREDIT_ADD)
Figure 41; Storage bet processing (MS_BET_IN)
Figure 42: Processing to subtract one from the number of stored sheets (MS_CREDIT_DEC)
Figure 43; Checkout process (MS_MEDAL_RET)
Figure 44; Reservation processing of stored medals (MS_CREDIT_RET)
45 and 46: Payout processing of one medal (MS_1MEDAL_PAY)
Figure 47: Error display (MS_ERROR_DSP)
Figure 48; Interrupt processing Figure 49; LED display control (IS_LED_OUT)
Figure 50: Power-off processing (IS_POWER_DOWN)
Figure 51: Send control command

FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing processing (M_PRG_START) when starting a program by the main control board 60.
In FIG. 20, when the program is started in step S11, the main control board 60 initializes the register in the next step S12. Specific processing includes, for example, setting of the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 62, setting of interrupt type (for example, setting to maskable interrupt), and parity bits to be given to the control command to be transmitted (For example, setting to even parity).
In other words, initial values necessary for normal operation of the slot machine 10 are set in various registers.
In the present embodiment, a plurality of registers (for example, an A register to an L register and a transmission register) are provided.

  Next, proceeding to step S13, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the power-off execution processing flag is a normal value. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned off, a power-off execution processing flag is stored in step S652 (FIG. 50) described later. The power-off execution processing flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was normally performed when the power was turned on. When it is determined that the power-off execution processing flag is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S14. When it is determined that the power-off execution process flag is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S16.

In step S14, a checksum of the RWM 61 is calculated. Specifically, a checksum calculation is performed in the same range (for example, a work area used in the program, an unused area, and a stack area) as the checksum of the RWM 61 executed by the power-off process. Here, in step S14, 1-byte data stored in the RWM 61 is added.
In step S15, it is determined whether or not the range of the RWM 61 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is designated from the address of the RWM 61 that calculated the current checksum, and it is determined whether or not the next address is an address for calculating the checksum. When it is determined that the checksum calculation has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S14. On the other hand, when it is determined that the range of the RWM 61 for calculating the checksum has been completed, the process proceeds to step S16.

Further, in the subsequent processing, when data stored in a plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM 61 is initialized, the same processing is executed in the range of the specified RWM 61 in the present embodiment.
When it is determined in step S13 that the power-off execution processing flag is not a normal value, an abnormal value is set as power-off recovery data without executing the checksum calculation of the RWM 61.

  In step S16, the main control board 60 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off execution processing flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation (all range) of the RWM 61 is normally completed, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off execution processing flag is an abnormal value and / or when it is determined that there is an abnormality at the time of checksum calculation (full range) of the RWM 61, the abnormal value is stored as the power-off recovery data.

  In the next step S17, the data of the input port 1 is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register). The input port 1 is the data shown in FIG. Next, the process proceeds to step S18, where it is determined whether or not the designated switch is on based on the data of the input port 1. In this embodiment, the “designated switch” is a signal (D1) of the door switch 16, a signal (D2) of the setting door switch 54, and a signal (D3) of the setting key switch 52 of the input port 1. One.

The signal of the door switch 16 is on (the front cover 11 is opened), the signal of the setting door switch 54 is on (the setting door is opened), and the setting key switch 52 The setting change is permitted only when the signal is on (when the setting key is inserted). When all three designated switches are on, it is possible to shift to the setting change process of step S22. However, when at least one designated switch is not on, it is not permitted to shift to the setting change process of step S22. .
That is, the setting key switch regardless of whether the signal of the door switch 16 is off (the front cover 11 is closed) or the signal of the setting door switch 54 is off (the setting door is closed). Since the signal 52 cannot be turned on and the possibility of fraud is high, the shift to the setting change process is not permitted.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S18 that all the designated switches are on, the process proceeds to step S19, and when it is determined that the switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S21.
In step S19, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the power-off recovery data is abnormal. This power-off recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S16.

When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is abnormal, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S22, and when it is determined that there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to step S20. In step S20, it is determined whether or not a setting change disable flag is on. Here, the setting change impossibility flag is one of data stored in the RWM 61, and is a flag that is disabled during a part lottery process (step S109) to a game end check process (step S117) described later. is there. When the setting change disable flag is on, the process proceeds to step S21, and when it is not on, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S22.
In the present embodiment, the setting change impossibility flag is provided. However, when the setting change is always possible, the setting change impossibility flag may not be provided. In that case, the process corresponding to step S20 becomes unnecessary.

  In step S21, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the power-off recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to step S19. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S23 to perform a power recovery process (M_POWER_ON). On the other hand, when it is determined that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S24, and a non-recoverable error process (SS_ERROR_STOP) is performed. An error when it is determined in step S21 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value is referred to as an “E1” error in the present embodiment, and “E1” is displayed in a predetermined digit (described later). The unrecoverable error is an error that cannot be canceled unless the setting change process is executed.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S22.
First, in step S31, “predetermined range” is stored in the register as the initialization range of the RWM 61. Here, it is a set for preparing when it is determined that the power-off process has been normally executed, and the initialization range in which the set value data, the gaming state (for example, the RT state), and the winning flag are not initialized is “ A predetermined range.

  Next, proceeding to step S32, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the power-off recovery data (value stored in step S16) is a normal value. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S34, and the “predetermined range” stored in step S31 is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S32 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S33, and the main control board 60 stores “specific range” in the register as the initialization range of the RWM 61. Here, when it is determined that the power-off is not normal, the set value data, the gaming state, and the winning flag are also set as “specific range” as the initialization range to be initialized.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S34, and initialization of the predetermined range set in step S31 or the specific range set in step S33 is started. In the next step S35, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S34 has been completed. When it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S36.

  In step S36, the interruption process is activated and set. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt processing designated in step S12 are set. In the present embodiment, timer interrupt processing is used as interrupt processing, and therefore processing for setting a timer interrupt cycle (in this embodiment, “2.235 ms”) corresponds. Then, interrupt processing is executed after the processing of step S36. In other words, the interrupt process is not executed before “interrupt activation”. In the next step S37, an output request set at the start of setting change is performed. This process is a process of setting (storing) a control command to be transmitted to the first sub-control board 80 in a register in order to notify the first sub-control board 80 of starting the setting change process.

  The “output request set” is often executed also in the process described below. However, as in step S37, a process for setting a control command to be transmitted to the first sub-control board 80 is performed. means. The control command here does not mean only a command that is actually transmitted, but also a command that is a source of a command that is actually transmitted.

Next, proceeding to step S38, the main CPU 62 executes the control command set 1. This process is a process for storing a control command for transmission to the first sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 61). Note that “control command set 1” is often executed in the processing described below, but similarly to step S38, processing for storing a control command to be transmitted to the first sub-control board 80. Means.
In the present embodiment, the control command data includes first control command data and second control command data, and different first control command data and second control command data are transmitted in response to an output request.

Next, proceeding to step S39, the main control board 60 sets a waiting time, and executes wait processing during the waiting time in the next step S40. In this embodiment, the interrupt count “224” is set as the waiting time. In step S40, wait processing is executed until the interrupt count counts “224” (until 1 is subtracted for each interrupt count and the set interrupt count becomes “0”).
Accordingly, since “2.235 ms” per interrupt is “2.235 ms”, a wait process of “2.235 ms × 224 times = 500.64 ms (about 0.5 seconds)” is performed.
Hereinafter, the “wait process” refers to a process of waiting so that the next process (step) is not executed until a predetermined time elapses. However, the interrupt process of FIG. 48 described later is executed.

In this process, the initialization process of the RWM 61 on the main control board 60 side (step S34) is completed in a relatively short time, whereas the initialization process of the RWM 81 on the first sub control board 80 side (FIG. 52 described later). Since step S702) takes time, wait processing is executed on the main control board 60 side. In particular, the main control board 60 cannot know whether the initialization process has been completed on the first sub-control board 80 side.
Specifically, the clear range of the RWM 61 of the main control board 60 (the range that is cleared when the setting is changed) is, for example, addresses “F000 (H) to F1FF (H)” (512 bytes in number of bytes). The clear range of the RWM 81 of one sub-control board 80 is, for example, an address “000000 (H) to 800000 (H)” (about 12 to 13 gigabytes in terms of the number of bytes).

Therefore, when the initialization process is still in progress on the first sub-control board 80 side, the initialization has already been completed on the main control board 60 side, and the process has further progressed. It is possible to prevent the progress of control processing of the one sub-control board 80 from becoming out of synchronization.
In addition, after execution of the output request set and control command set 1 at the start of setting change, the first sub-control board 80 starts initialization of the RWM 81. However, a sufficient time is required for the initialization of the RWM 81 to end. Set as. Thus, after the initialization process of the RWM 81 is completed on the first sub control board 80 side, the process proceeds to the processes after step S41 on the main control board 60 side.

  The control command at the start of setting change set in step S37 and step S38 is transmitted to the first sub control board 80 even during the wait process in step S40. However, while the wait process is being executed in step S40, the process after step S41 does not proceed (the main loop does not proceed).

With this configuration, it is possible to transmit a control command at the start of setting change to the first sub control board 80. Also, the processing after step S41 (end of setting change, start of game, etc.) can be delayed by the wait time. Furthermore, due to the delay of the processing after step S41, various control commands (commands at the end of setting change, commands at the time of operation of the bet switch 40, and the results of the role lottery based on the operation of the start switch 41 due to the delay of the processing after step S41. The transmission timing of the command etc.) can be delayed. Thereby, the first sub-control board 80 can control and output effects based on various commands at a timing synchronized with the processing of the main control board 60.
On the other hand, when the wait process of step S40 is not executed, the process of the main control board 60 is executed first. As a result, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated, the winning lottery result A is obtained, and when the effect a is output at the start of the rotation of the reel 31, the effect a is not output at the timing of starting the rotation of the reel 31, and the effect a is slightly delayed. Will be output.

  After the end of the wait process, the process proceeds to step S41, and it is determined whether or not the set value is in the normal range. In the present embodiment, since the set value is any one of “1” to “6” (integer), it is determined whether any of these “1” to “6”. When it is determined that the set value is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S43, where the set value is not within the normal range (values such as “7” and “255” are stored in the storage area of the RWM 61 that stores the set value). ), The process proceeds to step S42. In step S42, “1” is stored as the set value.

In step S43, unique LED display control is performed during setting change. Specifically, first, the value of the LED display request flag (FIG. 9) is updated to “00011100”. As a result, the digits 3 to 5 can be turned on. Second, a process of updating the acquired number display data to “FF” is executed. Here, “F” corresponds to the offset value in FIG. Therefore, since the display data of the digits 3 and 4 are both “F”, the actual display is “−−”.
As a result, when an interrupt process is executed after this process, the digit whose LED display request flag is “1” can be turned on.
Note that each of the above values has been initialized in step S34, and is “0” before the update.

In step S44, it is determined whether an operation of the setting change switch 53 is detected. Here, the rising data of the input port 1 is determined, and it is determined whether or not the D4 bit is “1”. When it is determined that the operation of the setting change switch 53 has been detected, the process proceeds to step S45, and when it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S46.
In step S45, the set value is updated. Specifically, the set value is stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RWM 61. Further, by executing the interrupt process after the set value is updated, the display value of the set value display LED 63 displays the updated value.

In the next step S46, it is determined whether or not an operation of the start switch 41 is detected. In this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during the setting change, the set value at that time is determined.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S47, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S44.

In step S47, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 52 has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch 52 has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S48 to perform LED display control after the setting change is completed. Specifically, first, the value of the LED display request flag (FIG. 9) is updated to “00001111”. Thereby, the digits 1 to 4 can be turned on. Second, a process of updating the acquired number display data to “00” is executed. Here, “0” corresponds to the offset value in FIG. Therefore, since the display data of the digits 3 and 4 are both “0”, the actual display is “00”.
As a result, when an interrupt process is executed after this process, the digit whose LED display request flag is “1” can be turned on.

Next, the process proceeds to step S49, and an output request set at the end of the setting change is performed as in step S37. This process is a process of ending the setting change process and notifying the determined setting value to the first sub-control board 80 side and setting a control command. Next, the process proceeds to step S50, and the main CPU 62 executes the control command set 1 as in step S38.
And it transfers to the main loop (M_MAIN) (FIG. 26) of step S100.

Subsequently, the control command set 1 (S_CMD_SET) in step S38 and the like in FIG. 21 will be described in more detail.
A plurality of addresses are provided in the RWM 61, and a storage area of a control command buffer is set for each address. In these storage areas, control command data (for transmission to the first sub control board 80) ( In this embodiment, 32 commands (64 bytes) are stored. It does not mean that only a storage area of the control command buffer is provided in the RWM 61 with a plurality of addresses.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the processing of the control command set 1 (S_CMD_SET). In the present embodiment, when the control command set 1 is processed, the processing after step S501 shown in FIG. 22 is executed (the same applies to “control command set 1” in other flowcharts).

First, in step S502, an interrupt prohibition process is executed. In the next step S503, control command set 2 (SS_CMD_SET) (FIG. 23) is executed. In step S504, the interrupt process prohibited in step S502 is canceled (that is, interrupt permission) is executed. Through the above processing, interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of the control command set 2.
In the control command set 2, the control command is written as shown below. While the control command set 2 is being executed, interrupt processing is prohibited as described above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction (such as writing to an address different from the normal write address) due to execution of interrupt processing during control command write processing.

Here, an interrupt flag for storing the prohibition / release of the interrupt is provided. The interrupt flag is turned on when the timing for executing the next interrupt process (within 2.235 ms from the time when the interrupt process is disabled) comes after the interrupt process is disabled in step S502. The main CPU 62 then clears the interrupt flag when canceling the prohibited interrupt processing.
When it is time to execute interrupt processing, the main control board 60 determines whether the interrupt flag is on or off, and determines whether interrupt processing is prohibited / permitted.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the control command set 2 (SS_CMD_SET).
First, in step S511, the address of the control command buffer is set. This process is a process for setting the head address of the control command buffer.
In the next step S512, a write pointer is acquired. The write pointer is for designating which address of the RWM 61 the control command data is to be written. Since the current write pointer is stored, a process for reading the write pointer is performed.

In the next step S513, a designated address is acquired. In this process, a write address (in the RWM 61) is obtained from the start address of the control command buffer and data indicating the current position of the write pointer.
Next, proceeding to step S514, data at a specified address is acquired. This process is a process of reading data stored in the storage area of the RWM 61 at the address obtained in step S513 of the preprocess.

  In “control command <32?” In the next step S515, processing for determining whether or not the data of the designated address is “0” is performed. When the data at the designated address is not “0”, the data already exists at the designated address. When the data at the designated address is “0”, that is, when there is no data at the designated address, the process proceeds to step S516, and when it is not “0”, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, when there is data at the specified address, the data writing process is not executed. This prevents overwriting when there is data at the specified address.

In “RWM designation?” In the next step S516, it is determined whether or not the data to be written to the control command buffer is data that needs to refer to the data stored in the RWM 61. For example, the number of medals inserted at the time of automatic betting at the time of replay winning depends on the previous game, so RWM is specified (note that detailed explanation on whether or not RWM is specified will be omitted, but the D register Judgment is made based on whether the D7 bit of the stored value is 0 or not.
When it is determined that RWM is designated, the process proceeds to step S517, and when it is determined that RWM is not designated, the process proceeds to step S518.

In step S517, data indicating the second control command is stored in a predetermined register (E register). In this process, data to be written as the second control command is read from the RWM 61 and stored in the register. Then, the process proceeds to step S518.
In step S518, data indicating the first control command is stored in the RWM 61. Here, the twelfth control command is stored in the address acquired in the “specified address acquisition” in step S513. Specifically, it is a process of storing the value of the D register stored before the control command set 2 process (in the case of RWM designation, a value obtained by adding 80 (H) to the value of the D register is stored. .)

In step S519, data indicating the second control command is stored in the RWM 61. In this process, the second control command is stored at the next address storing the first control command.
In step S520, the value of the write pointer is updated by “+1”. Note that data indicating the first control command and the second control command is written in the storage areas of the two RWMs 61. In the calculation of the “designated address acquisition” process in step S513, the data of the write pointer is doubled. Since the calculation is performed, the value of the write pointer is incremented by “1”.

  As described above, in FIG. 21, by executing the output request set at the start of setting change in step S37 and the control command set 1 (S_CMD_SET) at step S38, the control command data (first sub Data to be transmitted to the control board 80) is written to the control command buffer at a predetermined address. These control command data are transmitted to the first sub-control board 80 by an interrupt process described later. The same applies to the other “output request set” and “control command set 1”.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) in step S23 in FIG.
First, in step S51, the set value is read, and it is determined whether or not the range of the set value is a normal range (1 “1” to “6”). When it is determined that the set value is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S52. When it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S24, and the process proceeds to a non-recoverable error process (SS_ERROR_STOP). In this embodiment, the error in this case is referred to as an “E6” error, and “E6” is displayed in a predetermined digit (described later).

In step S52, the initialization range of the unused area of the RWM 61 is set in the register. In the next step S53, initialization of the RWM 61 in the range set in step S52 is executed. Here, it is conceivable that a value is stored in the RWM 61 due to noise or the like even in an unused area. If a value is stored in an unused area, there is a possibility that it may lead to fraud etc. Therefore, the unused area should be initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day). Yes.
In the next step S54, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 61 has been completed. If it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S55. In step S55, the values of input ports 0 to 2 (FIG. 11) are read. This process is a process for updating the input data before power-off to the latest input data.

  In the next step S56, interrupt processing is activated. Here, various registers corresponding to interrupt processing are set. In the present embodiment, timer interrupt processing is used as interrupt processing, and therefore processing for setting a timer interrupt cycle (in this embodiment, “2.235 ms”) corresponds. Then, interrupt processing is executed after this processing. In the next step S57, data indicating the power-off execution processing flag is cleared from the RWM 61. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the unrecoverable error processing (SS_ERROR_STOP) in step S24 in FIGS.
First, in step S61, the main control board 60 prohibits interrupt processing. This process is the same as step S502 described above. Control is performed so that no interrupt is generated even when an interrupt request signal (INT signal) is input. In other words, the timer interrupt process is not executed even when the timer interrupt period (2.235 ms) arrives. As a result, updating of various data stored in the RWM 61 by interruption processing, input / output, and the like are not executed, and erroneous information is transmitted to the first sub-control board 80 or transmitted to the hall computer. To prevent that.

In step S62, the output ports 0 to 6 are sequentially turned off. Specifically, all “0” s (“00000000”) are output from each address indicating the output ports 0 to 6 shown in FIGS. In step S63, the next output port address is set. That is, the address indicating the output port is incremented by “1”. For example, when the address of the output port 0 is “0F1 (H)”, the address “0F2 (H)” of the output port 1 is set as the next address.
In step S64, it is determined whether all output ports have been completed, that is, whether output port 6 has been completed. If it is determined that the process has not been completed, the process returns to step S62. If it is determined that the process has been completed, the process proceeds to step S65.

That is, by turning off all the output ports 0 to 6, the active signal output before the processing is executed is turned off. This can prevent LED burn-in, motor 32 burn-in, and medal swallowing. For example, if the power is cut off in a situation where a blocker signal is being output, the blocker 45 will remain on (the medal flow path is formed) unless the processing is executed (medal detection). Since no processing takes place, medals are swallowed).
If the power is cut off while the motor 32 is outputting φ1, unless the processing is executed, φ1 is continuously output until a reset signal is input. Normally, the time until the reset signal is input is short, but when the power supply voltage is reduced instantaneously, the power-off process is executed and then the normal power supply voltage is supplied. It will repeat the wait for reset without being done. For this reason, a situation in which φ1 continues to be output may occur.

  In step S65, the lower digit is set as error display data. Specifically, “08 (H) (00001000)” is stored in the H register. Here, the value stored in the H register indicates the LED display request flag (FIG. 9), and the value being “00001000” indicates that only the digit 4 is “1”, that is, ON. The digit 4 is a digit indicating the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 72 (FIG. 5).

In step S66, upper digits are set as error display data. Specifically, “04 (H) (00000100)” is stored in the D register. Here, the value stored in the D register also indicates the LED display request flag as in the H register, and the value of “00000100” indicates that only the digit 3 is “1”, that is, ON. Show. The digit 3 is a digit indicating the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 72.
In step S66, "79 (H) (01111001)" is stored in the E register. Here, the value stored in the E register is segment data (FIG. 10), and “01111001” is data indicating “E” on the display.

In step S67, the LED digit is turned off. This process is a process of outputting “00000000” to the address indicating the output port 0. Therefore, at the time of step S67, the output of all digits is “0” (lights off). Thereby, the flicker of LED can be prevented.
In the next “error display output” process in step S68, a process of outputting the value of the L register to the address indicating the output port 1 is performed. The segment data is stored in the L register before proceeding to the non-recoverable error processing. The value stored in the L register is display data for the lower digits.

  For example, in FIG. 20, when it is determined in step S21 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, “06 (H) (00000110)” is stored in the L register. This value is displayed as “1” (see FIG. 10).

  In FIG. 24, when it is determined in step S51 that the set value range is not the normal range, “7D (H) (011111101)” is stored in the L register. The display of this value is “6” (see FIG. 10).

Furthermore, in step S115 of FIG. 26, which will be described later, when it is determined that the kicked symbol is stopped on the active line and the process proceeds to the non-recoverable error process, “6D (H) (01101101) is stored in the L register. Is stored. This value is displayed as “5” (see FIG. 10).
As described above, the error display content is displayed as “E1”, “E5”, “E6”, “E7” (FIG. 48 described later), etc. Is omitted.)

In step S69, the LED digit is turned on. This process is a process of outputting the value of the H register to the address indicating the output port 0. The value of the H register is “08 (H) (00001000)” set in step S65. That is, data for turning digit 4 on.
In the next step S70, it is determined whether or not the display weight has ended. Here, the display weight is a process of subtracting “−1” from the value of the B register and determining whether or not the value of the B register becomes “0”.

In the present embodiment, “255” is set as the value of the B register at the start of the processing in step S68. The subtraction process is performed until the B register value becomes “0”. In this embodiment, the internal system clock is 16 MHz, and approximately
“1 / Internal system clock (16 MHz)” × 256 × 8 (command) + α (other commands) ≈0.128 ms
The B register is set to be “255” → “0” at

If it is determined that the display weight has ended, the process proceeds to step S71.
In step S71, switching between the upper digit and the lower digit is executed. Specifically, the DE register and the HL register are exchanged. For example, in the case of the above example:
D register: 04 (H) (00000100)
E register: 79 (H) (01111001)
H register: 08 (H) (00001000)
L register: 6D (H) (01101101)
Therefore, when the DE register and the HL register are exchanged,
D register: 08 (H) (00001000)
E register: 6D (H) (01101101)
H register: 04 (H) (00000100)
L register: 79 (H) (01111001)
It becomes.
Then, the process returns to step S67. Thereby, it is possible to switch from the lower digit display to the upper digit display by the same program processing. Further, the switching cycle of the upper digit / lower digit is about 0.128 ms. Therefore, after the upper digit is lit for 0.128 ms, the process of lighting the lower digit for 0.128 ms is repeated.

  For example, when the “E1” error is displayed in the digits 3 and 4 by the processing of the above steps S67 to S71, “E” is displayed on the digit 3 for about 0.128 ms (during this time, the digit 4 is turned off). Next, “1” is displayed on the digit 4 for about 0.128 ms (digit 3 is turned off during this period).

Further, the switching cycle of the upper digit / lower digit is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (2.235 ms), and the luminance at the time of error display is increased (details will be described later).
In other words, when performing error display using digits, the non-recoverable error has a higher luminance than the normal error, so the sub-control board side devices (effect lamp 21, speaker 22, image display device 23) are connected. Even if the error notification used is not performed (even if it cannot be performed), the hall clerk can easily notice.
As described above, even when an error occurs during the period when timer interrupt processing is not executed (not desired to be executed), the error display is appropriately performed using the LED by the arithmetic processing using the register and the hardware configuration. can do.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing main loop (M_MAIN) processing in the present embodiment. In FIG. 21, when it progresses to step S100, it transfers to the process of FIG.
Then, during this main loop processing, interrupt processing (FIG. 48) is performed every 2.235 ms.

In FIG. 26, in step S101, a stack pointer is set. Here, the stack pointer refers to an area of the RWM 61 that stores data (for example, a register value, instruction processing of the main loop before interrupt processing, etc.) at the time of the power failure when the power failure occurs. The set of is a process of setting the register value to the initial value in the RWM 61 area.
In the next step S102, a game start set (MS_GAME_SET) is performed. If it progresses to step S102, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 27 mentioned later.

In the next step S103, a bet medal is read. This process is a process of reading how many medals are bet at the present time. In the following description, “medal reading” refers to reading of the number of bets, and is different from reading of the stored number.
In the next step S104, the presence / absence of a bet medal is determined based on the bet number read in step S103.

  If it is determined in step S104 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S106. If it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S105, a medal insertion waiting process (FIG. 35; MS_STANDBY_DSP) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S106.

In step S106, a management process (MS_MEDAL_CHK) of inserted medals is performed. If it progresses to step S106, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 36 mentioned later.
In the next step S107, a soft random number update process is performed. This process is a process of updating (adding “1”) the random number used in the role lottery means 62b. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of 0 to 65535, and at the time of update, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value incremented at the time of interrupt) to a value before update is executed.

  In the next step S108, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S109, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S103.

In step S109, the combination lottery means 62b extracts a random value at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received, and executes the combination lottery.
In the next step S110, the reel control means 62c starts to rotate the reel 31. Next, the process proceeds to step S111, and the stop acceptance of the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 has been received, and when the operation signal is received, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the lottery result of the combination and the position of the reel 31, The reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

  In the next step S112, the reel control means 62c checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S113. In step S113, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 have been stopped. If it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S114. If it is determined that all the reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S111. .

  In step S114, symbol display determination is performed. Here, the winning determination means 62d determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the active line. In step S115, it is determined whether a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a symbol display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S24. If it is determined that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S116.

Here, since the stop of the reel 31 is executed based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 does not normally stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, if a symbol display that should not be displayed (a kicked symbol) is displayed on the active line as a result of the symbol display determination, it is determined that there is an abnormality and the process proceeds to step S24 and the above-mentioned non-recoverable error. Execute (SS_ERROR_STOP). The error display at this time is “E5” as described above.
Next, proceeding to step S116, when there is a winning combination, the payout means 62e pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination.

  Next, proceeding to step S117, the main control board 60 performs a game end check. This processing is processing for clearing the winning combination flag (RWM61), setting a weight, processing for shifting to a frozen state when performing freezing, processing for generating outer end signal data when transmitting an outer end signal, and the like. . Note that an operation state flag, which will be described later, is turned on in accordance with the winning combination at the start of the game (after the lottery), and is turned off in step S117.

  In step S117, the signal of the full sensor 38 which is the D5 bit of the input port 2 is determined, and when it is on, a full error is displayed. The full error is referred to as “FE error” in the present embodiment, and “FE” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72 (digits 3 and 4), so that the value of “EA” is stored in a predetermined register (eg, D register). Then, in order to transmit a command (error number) for indicating “FE error” to the first sub control board 80, a value of “9” is stored in a predetermined register (for example, E register). For this reason, when it is detected that the full sensor 38 signal is turned on, the process shifts to an error display (MS_ERROR_DSP; FIG. 47).

In the next step S118, an output request at the end of the game is set. This process is a process of setting control command data for transmitting to the first sub-control board 80 that one game has ended.
Next, proceeding to step S119, the main CPU 62 executes the control command set 1. This process is a process of storing control command data to be transmitted to the first sub-control board 80 in the control command buffer.
Then, when the process of step S119 ends, the process returns to step S100 again.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) in step S102 of FIG.
First, in step S121, a game standby display time is set. In this embodiment, “26846” interrupt (≈60,000 ms, that is, about 60 seconds (1 minute)) is set as the game standby display time. When the game standby display time is set in step S121, the number of interruptions is counted (subtracted) from this point.

  In the next step S122, the main control board 60 performs a gaming state set process (MS_ACTION_SET) (FIG. 28). This process is a process of setting the state at the time of replay operation, MB game, or CB game based on the result of the previous game before the start of the game. In the next step S123, the main control board 60 performs a game status output (MS_STATUS_SET) (FIG. 29). This process is a process for transmitting a command relating to the gaming state to the first sub-control board 80.

  In step S124, the main control board 60 checks the operating state flag. The operation state flag is checked by judging whether the operation state flag is on or off. More specifically, in this embodiment, it is determined in the next step whether or not the replay operation state is set.

  Next, it progresses to step S125 and it is judged based on the check in step S124 whether it is at the time of a replay action | operation. When it is determined in step S125 that the replay operation is being performed, the process proceeds to step S126, and when it is determined that the replay operation is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S129.

In step S126, a wait process for a predetermined time is executed in order to end the automatic medal insertion process. For example, in order to set a wait time of about 500 ms, the wait process is executed until the count value of the number of interrupts becomes “237” (237 × 2.235 ms = about 529.7 ms). The reason why this wait processing is provided is to prevent the replay display LED 73a from being turned on immediately after the game is finished (step S132) or automatically bet immediately after the game is finished (steps S135 and S136). (This is because it is not preferable in appearance). Note that the betting sound at the time of automatic betting is output based on the commands stored in step S133 and step S134.
Furthermore, the waiting time may be varied depending on the type of replay that has won. For example, when a special replay winning of “7” matches (ie, when AT starts), a wait time of 1 second or more may be set.

  Next, the processing proceeds to step S127, and processing for reading the number of stored medals (S_CREDIT_READ) (FIG. 30) is performed. In the next step S128, it is determined whether or not the stored number has reached the limit number. Specifically, the determination is made using the value stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register) in step S127. In the present embodiment, as described above, up to 50 storage (credit) medals are possible, and when the number of stored medals is 50 at the present time, it is determined that the number is the limit number of storage. When it is determined that the number is the storage limit number, the process proceeds to step S132, and when it is determined that the number is not the storage limit number, the process proceeds to step S129.

In step S129, processing for turning on the blocker 45 (MS_BLOCKER_ON) (FIG. 31) is executed. Here, when the blocker 45 is on, it is when the medal passage is formed. That is, when the replay has been won in the previous game and the storage limit number has not been reached, the blocker 45 is turned on in order to allow storage by subsequent medal maintenance, but the replay has won in the previous game, and When the storage limit number has been reached, the blocker 45 is kept off in order to disallow subsequent maintenance of medals.
On the other hand, if “NO” is determined in the step S125, the step S129 is executed without performing the determination of the step S128 (regardless of the number of stored sheets). This is because at least the bet number is “0”, so that it is possible to perform the care insertion. That is, since the blocker 45 can be turned on without making an unnecessary determination, the player can immediately put in a medal.
Note that the blocker 45 is uniformly turned off when it is determined “Yes” in step S108 (start switch 41 ON?) In FIG. 26 (the medal cannot be inserted when the reel 31 is rotating). Control).

  In the next step S130, as in step S124, the operation state flag is checked, and in the next step S131, it is determined whether or not the replay operation is being performed. When it is determined that the replay operation is being performed, the process proceeds to step S132, and when it is determined that the replay operation is not being performed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S132, a replay display LED lighting process is performed.
Here, in this embodiment, a medal management flag is provided (stored in the RWM 61). The medal management flag is 1-byte data composed of 8 bits D0 to D7, and is data indicating the following state.
D0: “1” when the start switch 41 is operable.
D1: Not used D2: “1” when the blocker 45 is in an ON state (medal can be maintained)
D3: “1” during replay operation (medal automatically inserted)
D4: “1” when the account is being processed
D5: Not used D6: Setting change disable flag (“1” when setting change is disabled)
D7: Medal limit determination (“1” when the limit is the number of medals)

In step S132, processing for turning on ("1") the D3 bit of the medal management flag is executed.
Note that the process of actually turning on the replay display LED 73a is performed in the process (specifically, step S640) in the LED display control (FIG. 49; IS_LED_OUT) in step S606 in the interrupt process (FIG. 48) described later.
In order to actually light the replay display LED 73a, a data signal (a signal for turning on the digit 4) is output from the D3 output terminal of the IC1, and a data signal (a signal for turning on the segment P) from the D7 output terminal of the IC2. ) Is output.

In the next step S133, an output request set process for transmitting a command indicating that an automatic bet has been made is performed on the first sub-control board 80, and a control command set 1 process is performed in the next step S134. Run.
In the next step S135, a process for adding one medal (in this case, means an automatic bet process), that is, one medal one by one in order to place three or two automatic bets based on the replay winning. The automatic bet (addition) process is performed (MS_MEDAL_INC) (FIG. 32). In the next step S136, it is determined whether or not the medal limit number has been reached (for example, three in normal game), and if it is determined that the medal limit number has been reached, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the medal limit number is not reached, the process returns to step S135, and the addition of one medal (automatic betting process) is continued.

  In the above process, the automatic bet process (steps S135 to S136) is performed after the output request set process at the time of automatic bet (and after transmission of the command at the time of automatic bet). Alternatively, an output request setting process at the time of automatic betting (and transmission of a command at the time of automatic betting) may be performed.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the game state setting process (MS_ACTION_SET) in step S122 of FIG.
First, in step S141, the symbol combination display flag data is acquired. In this process, the symbol combination on the active line after the reel 31 is stopped in the previous game, that is, the data relating to the winning combination is stored from the RWM 61 into the register. In the next step S142, an operating state flag is generated. For example, when winning a replay, an operation state flag related to the replay is generated based on the data stored in step S141. In the next step S143, the operating state flag is updated. That is, it replaces with the operation state flag produced | generated at step S142 instead of the operation state flag until then.

Next, the process proceeds to step S144, and the operating state flag updated in step S143 is saved (stored).
In the next step S145, based on the symbol flag data acquired in step S141, it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols for replay is displayed (whether the replay has won a prize). When it is determined that the replay symbol combination is displayed, the process proceeds to step S146. When it is determined that the replay pattern combination is not displayed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

  In step S146, the main control board 60 reads a bet medal. This process is a process of reading the number of medals bet in the previous game (FIG. 33). In step S147, automatic bet number data is set. This process is a process for setting address data storing the number of automatic bets. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the game status output (MS_STATUS_OUT) in step S123 of FIG.
First, in step S148, an output request for an operating state is set. In the next step S149, the control command set 1 is executed. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished. Specifically, information indicating that the replay is activated and the MB is activated is transmitted to the first sub-control board 80. Although not shown in the figure, information regarding the set value of the current game, information regarding the RT state of the current game, and the like are also transmitted.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the stored number reading process (S_CREDIT_READ) in step S127 of FIG. First, in step S151, the main control board 60 reads data on the number of stored sheets. The processing here is, for example, processing for storing the number of stored data stored in the RWM 61 in a predetermined register (for example, A register). Next, in step S152, the number of stored sheets read in step S151 is checked. Specifically, when the value of the A register is “0”, the zero flag (flag register) is set to “1”. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the blocker-on process (MS_BLOCKER_ON) in step S129 of FIG.
First, in step S161, the main control board 60 checks the passage of the blocker monitoring time. The blocker monitoring time is set in advance to a predetermined value (46 interrupts: about 102 ms), and starts counting when the passage sensor 43a is turned on (when a medal is detected). Next, the process proceeds to step S162, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time by the timer has elapsed. When it is determined that the time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S163, and when it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S161.

  In step S163, the main control board 60 prohibits interruption from this point. As described above, during the execution of the main loop (M_MAIN), one timer interrupt process is entered every 2.235 ms, but after the execution of the “interrupt disabled” process in step S163, the interrupt disabled is canceled. Controls not to allow interrupts until

In the next step S164, the main control board 60 performs processing for turning on the blocker signal. This process is a process of storing data in the RWM 61 for setting the D6 bit signal of the output port 3 to “1”. In the present embodiment, it is possible to output a maximum of 8 data to each output port, not limited to the output port 3. Also, output is executed by interrupt processing. That is, at this timing, the D6 bit of the output port 3 is not turned on, but after being stored in the RWM 61 once, the data is output based on the data stored in the RWM 61 during the process of outputting the output port 3.
In the next step S165, the value of the input monitoring counter is cleared. The insertion monitoring counter is a counter that is set to “+1” when the passage sensor 43a detects a medal and is set to “0” when the insertion sensors 44a and 44b detect a medal. In other words, the counter repeats “+1” and “0” in the normal state. This is because when the blocker 45 is turned on, that is, when the medal passage is formed by the blocker 45, the medal detects the passage sensor 43a.

  In the next step S166, the flag of the blocker signal state is turned on. Here, the process of turning on (“1”) the D2 bit of the medal management flag described above is performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S167, where the interrupt inhibition set in step S163 is canceled, that is, the interrupt is permitted. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

In the above, the reason for not generating an interrupt between the processes of steps S164 to S166 is as follows.
In the present embodiment, the blocker signal is turned on in step S164, and the blocker state signal is turned on in step S166. In this case, when an interrupt occurs between step S164 and step S166, one is turned on and the other is turned off. Specifically, due to an interrupt process that is entered in the middle, an inconsistency that ON is not output (not lit) to the input enable display LED 73b occurs even though ON is output to the blocker 45. Become. In other words, in order to avoid such a state and to update both values at once, it is possible to control so as not to confuse the player by prohibiting interrupt processing. Note that the processing is executed in the order of steps S164, S165, and S166 in the present embodiment, but the order of these may not be the same as the processing order in the present embodiment. For example, the order of steps SS166, S165, and S164 may be used.

  Further, according to the processing of FIG. 31, the blocker 45 is turned on after about 100 ms from the passage sensor 43a detecting a medal, and a medal passage is formed. The reason for this setting is to prevent the blocker 45 from being turned on at the moment when the inserted medal (medal detected by the passage sensor 43a) reaches the blocker 45, and the medal is prevented from being caught by the blocker 45. Therefore, after the passage sensor 43a detects a medal, the blocker 45 is controlled not to be turned on until a predetermined time (a time during which the medal may be pinched) elapses.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the process of adding one medal (MS_MEDAL_INC) in step S135 of FIG.
First, in step S171, the main control board 60 reads a bet medal (S_PLAYM_READ) (FIG. 33 described later).
In the next step S172, a process of adding “1” to the number of medals (“+1”) is performed.
Specifically, the RWM 61 stores “medal number data” in this process, and a process of adding “1” to the medal number data is performed. Then, the calculation result is stored in the C register. For example, if the number of medals so far was “0”, by adding “1”,
C register value = 00000001
It becomes.

In the next step S175, the main control board 60 clears the acquired number display. Here, in the present embodiment, “acquired number display data” is included as data stored in the RWM 61. The acquired number display data consists of “00 (H)” to “08 (H)” (in this embodiment, the maximum payout number in one game is 8), and any value is stored in the RWM 61. However, in this step S175, the process of setting to “00” is performed regardless of the value up to that point.
Note that the process of setting the display of the acquisition number display LED 72 to “00” is performed by LED display control (IS_LED_OUT; FIG. 49) in an interrupt process described later.

  Next, proceeding to step S176, the main control board 60 generates lighting data for the input display LEDs 73e to 73g. The process of actually turning on the input display LEDs 73e to 73g is performed by the LED display control (IS_LED_OUT; FIG. 49) in the interrupt process described later, as described above. Here, the input display LEDs 73e to 73g Processing to update the signal data is performed. Specifically, it is as follows.

First, “1” is added to the value of the A register. When the A register value before addition is “0”,
A register value (before addition): 00000000
A register value (after addition): 00000001
It becomes.
Next, the A register value is shifted to the right by one digit. This shift process is not only a right shift but also a cyclic shift instruction that sets the value of the D0 bit to D7, and is also called a rotate shift. This process
A register value (before shift): 00000001
A register value (after shift): 10000000
It becomes.

In the next step S177, the main control board 60 determines whether or not generation of lighting data for the number of inserted sheets has been completed. Specifically, it is as follows.
First, “1” is subtracted from the C register value. Since the C register value is “1” as described above,
C register value (before operation): 00000001
C register value (after operation): 00000000
It becomes.
Then, when the C register value is not “0”, “No” is set in step S177, and when it is “0”, “Yes” is set.

If it is determined in step S177 that the number of inserted sheets has not been completed, the process returns to step S176, and generation of lighting data is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of inserted sheets has been completed, the process proceeds to step S178, and the main control board 60 performs control to store lighting data of the input display LEDs in the RWM 61.
Actually performing the lighting control using the input display LED signal data is executed by an interrupt process described later.
Specifically, the process of step S178 is as follows.
First, the A register value is stored in the input display LED signal data. Therefore,
Input display LED signal data: 10000000
It becomes.

In addition, when one medal has already been inserted, it is as follows.
In step S172,
C register value = 00000010
It becomes.
In step S176,
A register value (before addition): 00000000
A register value (after addition): 00000001
It becomes.
further,
A register value (before shift): 00000001
A register value (after shift): 10000000
It becomes.

In the next step S177,
C register value (before operation): 00000010
C register value (after operation): 00000001
It becomes.
Therefore, since the C register value ≠ “0”, the process returns to step S176.
In step S176,
A register value (before addition): 10000000
A register value (after addition): 10000001
It becomes.
further,
A register value (before shift): 10000001
A register value (after shift): 11000000
It becomes.

Next, the process proceeds to step S177.
C register value (before operation): 00000001
C register value (after operation): 00000000
It becomes.
Since the C register value = “0”, “Yes” is determined in the step S177, and the process proceeds to the step S178.
Thereby, in step S178,
Input display LED signal data: 11000000
It becomes.
In this way, by using the registers (C register, A register) and the shift process, the input display LED signal data can be stored in the corresponding data with a small program process (simple program).

After step S178, the process proceeds to step S179, and the main control board 60 sets the medal limit number (MS_MMAX_SET) (FIG. 34 described later).
Here, the medal limit number means the maximum value of the number of medals that can be bet on the slot machine 10 (or the number of medals that must be bet in the game). Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the maximum number of medals that can be bet differs depending on the gaming state, this means the maximum number of medals that can be bet on the gaming state. In particular, in this embodiment, a maximum of 3 medals can be bet in a normal game, and a maximum of 2 medals can be bet in an MB game. Therefore, the medal limit number excluding during the MB game is 3, and the medal limit number during the MB game is 2.

Next, proceeding to step S180, the main control board 60 performs a betting medal reading process (S_PLAYM_READ) (same as step S171).
In the next step S181, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the bet number is a limit number. Specifically, by subtracting the bet number (value of the C register) from the medal limit number (value of the A register), if “0”, it is determined that the bet number is the limit number. When it is determined that the bet number is not the limit number, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the bet number is the limit number, the process proceeds to step S182. In step S182, a medal limit flag (one piece of information stored in the RWM 61) is set. That is, the flag indicating that the bet limit number is reached at the present time is turned on, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

  In the above-described steps S176 to S178 (portion surrounded by a two-dot chain line), all of the lighting data for the number of inserted sheets is created and all of the lighting data for the number of inserted sheets is created (“Yes” in step S177). The lighting control of the input display LEDs 73e to 73g is executed. Thus, for example, when three medals are inserted by operating the 3 (MAX) bet switch 40, all three of the insertion display LEDs 73e to 73g are lighted almost simultaneously in an instant by an interrupt process.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to sequentially turn on the one-sheet insertion display LED 73e, the two-sheet insertion display LED 73f, and the three-sheet insertion display LED 73g to such an extent that they can be visually recognized.
As the method,
1) For example, wait processing (for example, 46 interrupts (about 102 ms)) is provided between steps S175 and S176. 2) Wait processing is performed before executing step S135 after determining “No” in step S136, for example. To do.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing medal reading processing (S_PLAYM_READ) (step S171 in FIG. 32, etc.). First, in step S191, the main control board 60 reads medal number data. The processing here is, for example, processing for storing the read bet medal number data in a predetermined register (A register).
In step S192, the main control board 60 checks the number of medals read in step S191. For example, it is for checking whether or not the read value is “0”. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the medal limit number set processing (MS_MMAX_SET) in step S179 of FIG. In step S201, the limit number for automatic betting is set. The automatic bet refers to an automatic bet of medals at the time of a replay winning, and the number of bets made in the game is the limit number at the time of automatic bet. In the next step S202, the operation state flag described above is checked.

  In the next step S203, the main control board 60 determines whether or not it is during a replay operation. When it is during replay operation, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is not on, the process proceeds to step S204. In step S204, two medals are set as the limit number.

  Next, proceeding to step S205, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the game is a game with a limit of 2 medals. As described above, for example, when the game is a normal game, it is determined that the medal limit number is not two, and when the MB game is in progress, it is determined that the medal limit number is two.

When the limit number of medals is two, two sheets have already been set in step S204, and the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the medal limit number is not two, the process proceeds to step S206, and three medal limit number is set. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.
The medal limit number set in FIG. 34 is stored in a predetermined register (for example, C register).

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the medal insertion wait (MS_STANDBY_DSP) in step S105 of FIG.
First, in step S411, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the signal of the setting key switch 52 is on. Here, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit is “1” in the rising signal of the input port 1. When the rising signal of the setting key switch 52 is on, the process proceeds to step S412. When it is determined that the setting key switch 52 is not on, the process proceeds to step S421. That is, when the setting key switch 52 is turned on in the medal insertion waiting state (when the setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot), the setting confirmation mode is entered, and the processes of steps S411 to S420 are executed. The setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the current setting value is confirmed (confirmed visually by the administrator), and the setting value cannot be changed.

  In this embodiment, the determination in step S411 is performed based on the rising signal of the setting key switch 52. Thereby, for example, when the setting key switch 52 is turned on during the game, the rising signal is off (the setting key switch 52 is on) even if the determination in step S411 is performed, and thus the setting confirmation mode is not entered. The setting value cannot be confirmed illegally. Of course, if these are not taken into consideration, the determination in step S411 or step S416 described later may be performed by turning the setting key switch 52 on and off.

In step S412, the blocker 45 is turned off (MS_BLOCKER_OFF; FIG. 39 described later). Thereby, even if a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 43, it is returned from the payout slot 14.
In the next step S413, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the start of setting value display. Then, in the next step S414, control command data at the start of setting value display to be transmitted to the first sub-control board 80 is set.

  In step S415, the main control board 60 turns on the D4 bit (digit 5) of the LED display request flag (FIG. 9) as a process for lighting the set value display LED 63. In this process, the D0 to D3 bits of the LED display request flag remain “1”. Thereby, the set value display LED 63 (digit 5) can be turned on, and the current set value can be displayed. The process of actually turning on / off the set value display LED 63 is performed by the LED display control (IS_LED_OUT) in the interrupt process.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S416, and it is continuously determined whether or not the signal of the setting key switch 52 has been turned off. In this process, contrary to step S411, it is determined whether or not the falling signal of the D3 bit of the input port 1 has become “1”. When it is determined that the signal of the setting key switch 52 has been turned off, the process proceeds to step S417, and the main control board 60 performs the D4 bit (digit 5) of the LED display request flag described above as a process of turning off the setting value display LED 63. Is turned off ("0"). In this process, the D0 to D3 bits of the LED display request flag remain “1”. As a result, the set value display LED 63 (digit 5) can be turned off.

Next, proceeding to step S418, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the end of setting value display. Then, in the next step S419, the control command data at the end of setting value display to be transmitted to the first sub-control board 80 is set.
In the next step S420, the main control board 60 performs a process of turning on the blocker (MS_BLOCKER_ON; process of FIG. 31). In step S421, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the game standby display time has passed the “26846” interrupt (about 60 seconds) set in step S121 (FIG. 27).

When it is determined that the game standby display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S422, and a process of clearing the display of the acquired number display LED 72 is executed. This process is the same as the process in step S175 of FIG. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S421 that the game standby display time has not elapsed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
That is, in this embodiment, when the game is not performed for a predetermined time, the display of the acquisition number display LED 72 is cleared, but the replay display LED 73a, the storage number display LED 71, and the input display LEDs 73e to 73g are not cleared. It is composed. As a result, the number of bets that can be bet, that a player can play again, or that can be reimbursed continues to be displayed, so when a player tries to leave the seat, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the player has finished the game. Thereby, it can reduce that a player suffers a disadvantage.

  In addition, the fact that the number of acquired numbers (for example, 8) has been acquired is continuously displayed by the display of the acquired number of sheets when the player finishes the game (leaves the seat by performing a checkout process). , Because it is confused with other players and people involved in the hall that the player has not finished playing (even if the player is still trying to play) Yes.

By the processing of step S121 of FIG. 27 and steps S421 and S422 of FIG. 35, a timer of about 60 seconds is set at the start of the game, and when the 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game, the display contents of the acquisition number display LED 72 are cleared. Do (set to “00”).
As a result, for example, during the rotation of the reels 31 or when the winning combination is not won when the reels 31 are stopped (regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won), “00” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72. State. For example, when the bell 01 wins when all the reels 31 are stopped (during a normal game), the display of the acquisition number display LED 72 changes from “00” to “08”.

In addition, in the addition of one medal (MS_MEDAL_INC) in FIG. 32, the display of the acquired number is cleared in step S175. Display of the acquired number of times is cleared.
Since the above control is an example, for example, nothing may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72 during rotation of the reels 31, when a winning combination is not made when all the reels 31 are stopped, or when a medal is inserted. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is provided control for changing the power consumption in the sub state based on the operation of the operation switch when the setting key switch 52 is turned off in step S416.
Specifically, it has a “normal mode” and a “power saving (economy) mode”, and depending on these modes, the type of lighting of the effect lamp 21 during the game standby or the game, a decrease in luminance, and the normal Control is performed such that the volume of the sound is reduced.
In the present embodiment, when the setting key switch 52 is turned off, the normal mode is set to the power saving mode by turning the left and right stop switches 42 on and off.
Specifically, it is as follows.
1) Left stop switch 42 off, right stop switch 42 off: no mode transition 2) Left stop switch 42 on, right stop switch 42 off: transition to normal mode 3) Left stop switch 42 off, right stop switch 42 on: saving Transition to power mode 4) Left stop switch 42 on, right stop switch 42 on: no mode transition

Information processing is as follows.
If it is determined in step S416 that the setting key switch 52 is off, the level data of the input port 0 is acquired. Then, the level data of the input port 0 is stored in the A register.
Next, an AND (logical product) operation is performed on the level data (data stored in the A register) of the input port 0 and “10100000”, and the operation result is stored in the A register.
As shown in FIG. 11, the D5 bit of the input port 0 is a signal of the left stop switch 42, and the D7 bit is a signal of the right stop switch 42. Therefore, by performing an AND operation on the level data of the input port 0 and “10100000”, it is possible to create data indicating whether the left or right stop switch 42 is on.

  Next, the operation result is shifted to the right by one digit so that the data stored in the A register becomes the second control command data. For example, when the A register value is “10100000” (when the left and right stop switches 42 are ON), “01010000” is obtained. When the A register value is “10000000” (when the right stop switch 42 is on), the value is “01000000”. Furthermore, when the A register value is “00000000” (when the left and right stop switches 42 are off), it remains “00000000”.

  In this embodiment, the control command transmitted from the main control board 60 to the first sub control board 80 includes the first control command and the second control command. Determines whether the received command is a first control command or a second control command depending on whether the most significant bit is “1” or “0”. In the present embodiment, the control command with the most significant bit “1” is the first control command, and the control command with the most significant bit “0” is the second control command. Therefore, in order to set the most significant bit to “0”, the bit value is shifted to the right by one digit.

In the output request set at the end of setting value display in step S418, the A register value is stored in the E register. In the present embodiment, of the control commands at the end of setting value display, the first control command is stored in the D register, and its value is “100001111” (8F (H)). Further, the second control command (E register value) is determined according to whether the left and right stop switches 42 are turned on or off.
1) 01000000 (40 (H)) (when the right stop switch 42 is on)
2) 00010000 (10 (H)) (when left stop switch 42 is on)
3) 01010000 (50 (H)) (when the left and right stop switches 42 are on)
4) 00000000 (0 (H)) (Left and right stop switch 42 off)
Either.

Then, in the control command set 1 in step S419, the D register value is set as the first control command data, and the E register value is set as the second control command data.
When these data are transmitted to the first sub-control board 80, the control data is further transmitted to the second sub-control board 90. The second sub-control board 90 controls lighting of the effect lamp 21 during game standby in a predetermined pattern, depending on whether it is the normal mode or the power saving mode.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the medal management process (MS_MEDAL_CHK) in step S106 of FIG.
In FIG. 36, in step S211, the main control board 60 detects whether or not the blocker signal is on. When the blocker signal is on, the process proceeds to step S212, and when the blocker signal is not on, the process proceeds to step S213. Here, “the blocker signal is ON” corresponds to a case where a medal passage is formed by the blocker 45. In the present embodiment, it is detected whether or not the D2 bit data of the medal management flag is ON.

  In step S212, the main control board 60 detects whether or not the data relating to the making sensor signal is ON. If it is determined that the data relating to the insertion sensor signal is ON, it means that the medal has been inserted, so that the process proceeds to step S222 (MS_INSERT_CHK: FIG. 37), and a check process for medal maintenance is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not ON, the process proceeds to step S213.

In step S213, a request for checking whether or not a bet operation and a settlement operation can be accepted is set. Then, in the next step S214, it is checked whether or not these operations can be accepted.
Next, proceeding to step S215, the main control board 60 determines whether or not operation acceptance is possible. When it is determined that it is possible, the process proceeds to step S216. When it is determined that it is not possible, the process according to this flowchart is terminated and the process returns to the main loop.

It is determined whether or not it is possible to accept the operation of the bet switch 40 and the settlement switch 46 before performing the betting process or the settlement process by the processing of the above steps S213 to S215, and only when it is possible. , The process proceeds to the betting process or the settlement process.
In step S216, confirmation requests for the bet switch signal and the settlement switch signal are set.

  In the next step S217, based on the confirmation in step S216, it is determined whether there is a rising edge of any signal of the bet switch 40 or the settlement switch 46. When it is determined that neither signal rises, that is, when it is determined that neither the bet switch 40 nor the settlement switch 46 has changed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated and the process returns to the main loop.

  If it is determined in step S217 that any signal rises, the process proceeds to step S218. In step S218, the acceptance permission flag of the start switch 41 is cleared. This flag means the above-described medal management flag, and is a process of setting the D0 bit of the medal management flag to “0”. When the acceptance permission flag of the start switch 41 is “0”, the game start LED 73d is turned off to indicate that the start switch 41 is not valid (invalid even if operated). On the other hand, when the acceptance permission flag of the start switch 41 is “1”, the game start LED 73d is lit to indicate that the start switch 41 is valid. The actual output of turning on / off the game start LED 73d is executed by an interrupt process.

Therefore, when any of the signals of the bet switch 40 or the settlement switch 46 is changed, the bet switch is updated after the data of the RWM 61 is updated in order to notify that the start switch 41 is not permitted. 40 or the processing based on the operation of the settlement switch 46 (in FIG. 36, settlement processing (MS_MEDAL_RET) or storage bet processing (MS_BET_IN)) is executed.
Note that the process based on the start switch 41 (for example, the role lottery process) is executed in the main loop, and the settlement process and the stored bet process are also performed in the main loop. For example, the process based on the start switch 41 during the settlement process Is configured not to run.

Next, proceeding to step S219, the main control board 60 sets a data confirmation request related to the settlement switch 46 signal.
Then, in the next step S220, the main control board 60 determines whether there is a rise of the settlement switch 46 signal based on the confirmation in step S219. When it is determined that the adjustment switch 46 signal rises, the process proceeds to step S221 to execute the adjustment process (MS_MEDAL_RET: FIG. 43). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no rising of the settlement switch signal, it means that there is a rising of the bet switch signal, so the process proceeds to step S223, and the stored bet process (MS_BET_IN: FIG. 41) is executed.

FIGS. 37 and 38 are flowcharts showing the check process (MS_INSERT_CHK) at the time of medals maintenance in step S222 of FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart following FIG.
In FIG. 37, in step S231, the main control board 60 clears the acceptance permission flag of the start switch 41 (as described above, the D0 bit of the medal management flag).
Next, proceeding to step S232, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data relating to the closing sensor 1 (44a) signal is ON.

  When the data relating to the input sensor 1 signal is on, the process proceeds to step S233, and when it is not on, the process proceeds to step S238. In step S233, the passage check time of the closing sensor 1 (the number of interruptions is 64, about 143 ms) is set. Here, when a medal is detected by the insertion sensor 1, the data related to the insertion sensor 1 signal is turned on. However, when the data related to the insertion sensor 1 signal is not turned off after a predetermined time has elapsed, the medal Since clogging or the like is considered, the passage check time of the closing sensor 1 is measured.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S234, and the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data relating to the input sensors 1 and 2 is OFF in the same manner as in step S232. When it is determined that the data related to the input sensors 1 and 2 is OFF, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

  Here, after the data related to the insertion sensor 1 signal is turned on in step S232, it is rare that the data related to the insertion sensor 1 signal is determined to be off in step S234. In some cases, the data related to the input sensor 1 signal is temporarily turned on due to a rampage or the like, and the on-state is detected in step S232. Even if data related to the insertion sensor 1 signal is temporarily turned on due to noise or a medal in the selector, the process of step S234 prevents the process from proceeding to step S235 and subsequent steps. That is, even if such a phenomenon occurs, it is determined that there is an error, and error notification is not performed, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

  If it is determined in step S234 that the data related to the input sensors 1 and 2 is not OFF, the process proceeds to step S235. In step S235, it is determined whether data relating to the input sensors 1 and 2 is ON. When it is determined that the data relating to the input sensors 1 and 2 is on, the process proceeds to step S240, and when it is determined that the data is not on, the process proceeds to step S236.

In step S236, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the closing sensor 1 signal is ON. When it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S237, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S238.
In step S237, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the passage check time of the making sensor 1 has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the time set in step S233 has passed a predetermined time. When it is determined that the passage check time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S248, and when it is determined that the passage check time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S234.

  When it is determined in step S232 that the data related to the insertion sensor 1 signal is not on, or in step S236, it is determined that the data related to the insertion sensor 1 signal is not on and the process proceeds to step S238, the main control board 60 Set display request for illegal passing error. This illegal medal passing error is referred to as “CP error” in the present embodiment, and “CB” is displayed in a predetermined register (for example, D register) in order to display “CP” on the acquired number display LED 72 (digits 3 and 4). Is stored, and a value of “5” is stored in a predetermined register (for example, E register) in order to transmit a command (error number) to the first sub-control board 80 (a list of error numbers will be described later). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S239 to shift to error display (MS_ERROR_DSP; FIG. 47).

  Further, in step S235, it is determined that the data related to the input sensors 1 and 2 is ON, and when the process proceeds to step S240, the main control board 60 sets the passage check time of the input sensor 2 (the number of interruptions is about 143 ms). set. Next, proceeding to step S241, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the closing sensor 2 signal is ON. When the data relating to the input sensor 2 signal is on, the process proceeds to step S245, and when it is not on, the process proceeds to step S242. In step S242, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data relating to the input sensors 1 and 2 is ON. When it is on, the process proceeds to step S243, and when it is not on, the process proceeds to step S238.

  In step S243, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the passage check time of the making sensor 2 has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the time set in step S240 has passed a predetermined time. When it is determined that the passage check time of the closing sensor 2 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S248, and when it is determined that the passage check time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S244. In step S244, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the passage check time of the making sensor 1 has elapsed. When it is determined that the passage check time of the closing sensor 1 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S248, and when it is determined that the passage check time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S241.

  In step S241, it is determined that the data related to the input sensor 2 signal is ON. When the process proceeds to step S245, the main control board 60 determines whether the data related to the input sensor 1 and 2 signals is OFF. When it is determined that the data related to the input sensors 1 and 2 is OFF, the process proceeds to step S249 in FIG. 27, and when it is determined that the data is not OFF, the process proceeds to step S246. In step S246, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the closing sensor 2 signal is ON.

  When it is determined that the data related to the input sensor 2 signal is not on, the process proceeds to step S238, and when it is determined that the data is on, the process proceeds to step S247. In step S247, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the passage check time of the making sensor 2 has elapsed. When it is determined that the passage check time of the closing sensor 2 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S248, and when it is determined that the passage check time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S245.

  In step S248, a medal retention error display request is set. The medal retention error means that the data related to the insertion sensor 1 or 2 signal is turned on even after the passage check time has elapsed, and the medal is retained in the medal passage. It is. This medal retention error is referred to as a “CE error” in this embodiment, and a value of “CA” is displayed in a predetermined register (for example, D register) in order to display “CE” on the acquisition number display LED 72 (digits 3 and 4). And a value of “4” is stored in a predetermined register (for example, E register) in order to transmit a command (error number) indicating “CE error” to the first sub-control board 80. Then, the process proceeds to step S239 to shift to error display (MS_ERROR_DSP; FIG. 47).

  If it is determined in step S245 that the data related to the insertion sensors 1 and 2 is OFF and the process proceeds to step S249 in FIG. 38, the main control board 60 sets a display request for an abnormal medal insertion error. Here, the medal abnormal insertion error is an error indicating that there is a passage abnormality between the passage sensor 43a and the insertion sensors 1 and 2. The medal abnormal insertion error is referred to as “C1 error” in the present embodiment. When this medal abnormal insertion error occurs, a predetermined register is displayed to display “C1” on the acquisition number display LED 72 (digits 3 and 4). The value of “C1” is stored in (for example, D register), and a command (error number) indicating “C1 error” is transmitted to the first sub-control board 80 in order to “ The value “8” is stored.

  In step S250, the main control board 60 subtracts “1” from the value of the input monitoring counter. Here, as described above, the insertion monitoring counter is a counter that is set to “+1” when the passage sensor 43a detects a medal, and is set to “0” when the insertion sensors 1 and 2 detect a medal. That is, when normal, “+1” and “0” are repeated.

  Next, proceeding to step S251, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the value of the input monitoring counter is in the range of “0” to “3”. If it is determined that it is within the range, the process proceeds to step S252. If it is determined that it is not within the range, the process proceeds to step S239 in FIG. 37, and the process proceeds to error display (MS_ERROR_DSP; FIG. 47) as described above.

For example, the value of the counter is “−1” when the input sensors 1 and 2 are passed without passing through the passage sensor 43a.
Further, the value of the counter is “+4” when the medal that has passed through the passage sensor 43 a is staying before passing through the insertion sensors 1 and 2.

In step S252, the medal limit number is set (MS_MMAX_SET: FIG. 34). In step S253, a bet medal (the number of medals currently bet) is read (S_PLAYM_READ: FIG. 33).
In the next step S254, the stored number is read (S_CREDIT_READ: FIG. 30).

Next, proceeding to step S255, the main control board 60 calculates the total number of medals and the number of reserved bets at the present time. In the next step S256, after enabling the insertion of medals, it is determined whether or not the subsequent insertion of medals is impossible. In this embodiment,
“Current bet number” + “Current stored number” −49 = “Medal limit number”
Is calculated whether or not
Here, the “current bet number” indicates the number of medals before adding the medals currently passed. For example, when the current bet number is “2” and the current storage number is “50”, the medal limit number is “3”, and this formula is satisfied. It is determined that subsequent medals cannot be inserted.

If it is determined that it cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to step S257 to execute processing for turning off the blocker 45 (MS_BLOCKER_OFF: FIG. 39). Then, the process proceeds to step S258. On the other hand, when it is determined that the input is possible, step S257 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S258.
When the blocker signal is on, a medal passage that passes through the insertion sensors 1 and 2 is formed. When the blocker signal is off, a medal passage that returns a medal inserted from the medal insertion port 43 from the payout port 14 is formed. Form.

In the next step S258, the main control board 60 sets an output request for medal maintenance, and in the next step S259, the control command set 1 is executed.
In the next step S260, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the bet number of medals is a limit number (upper limit number) at the present time. When it is determined that the number of bets is a limit value, the process proceeds to step S262, and a storage (credit) number addition process (MS_CREDIT_ADD: FIG. 40) is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the bet number is not the limit number, the process proceeds to step S261, and bet addition processing for one medal is performed (MS_MEDAL_INC: FIG. 32).

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing blocker off processing (MS_BLOCKER_OFF). As described above, after the medal care becomes effective, when the medal care becomes impossible (cannot be accepted), the blocker 45 is driven to pay out the medal that has been maintained from the medal slot 43. Control is made to form a medal passage to be returned from the mouth 14.

  First, in step S271, the main control board 60 performs a blocker signal confirmation process. Here, the D6 bit of 1-byte data stored in the storage area of the RWM 61 is confirmed. In this 1-byte data, the D0 to D5 bits are unused, the D6 bit is blocker signal data, and the D7 bit indicates hopper motor drive signal data. The blocker signal data is used in step S272 below, and the hopper motor drive data is used in step S356 described later.

  In step S272, the main control board 60 determines whether the blocker signal is off (the blocker signal data is “0”). When it is determined that it is not off, the process proceeds to step S273, and when it is determined that it is off, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, when the blocker 45 is already turned off, the process according to this flowchart is terminated without proceeding with the process for turning off the blocker 45.

  When it is determined in step S272 that the blocker signal is not OFF and the process proceeds to step S273, the main control board 60 prohibits interruption from this point. As described above, during execution of the main loop (M_MAIN), one timer interrupt process is entered every 2.235 ms. If there is a description of “interrupt disabled” as in step S273, the interrupt is disabled. Control is made so that interrupts are not permitted until is released.

In the next step S274, the main control board 60 performs processing for turning off the blocker signal. This process is a process for setting the D6 bit of the output port 3 to “0”. Specifically, by setting the blocker signal data to “0”, the D6 bit of the output port 3 becomes “0” during the next interrupt processing. In the next step S275, a process for turning off the blocker signal state is performed. This processing is processing for setting the D2 bit of the medal management flag to “0”.
Then, the process proceeds to step S276, and the main control board 60 sets an abnormal input detection time of the making sensor 2.

Here, in this embodiment, after the blocker 45 is turned on (from medal passage) to off (medal return), even if the on signal of the insertion sensor 2 is detected before the predetermined time elapses, the abnormality of the insertion sensor 2 is detected. Although it is not determined as an input, when an on signal of the closing sensor 2 is detected after a predetermined time has elapsed, it is determined that the closing sensor 2 is in an abnormal input. Specifically, the medal may pass through the insertion sensors 44a (1) and 44b (2) immediately after the blocker 45 is physically turned off or in the middle of being turned off. This is to prevent detection as an error (considering normal passage). For this reason, the detection time of the input sensor abnormality input (the following 500.64 ms) is set at the timing of step S276.
The measurement of 500.64 ms is performed by setting the count value “224” of the number of interrupts (1 interrupt time “2.235 ms” × number of times “224” = 500.64 ms).

  When the detection time of the input sensor abnormality input is set in step S276, the process proceeds to step S277, where the interrupt inhibition set in step S273 is canceled, that is, the interrupt is permitted. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

In the above process, no interruption is generated between the processes of steps S274 to S276, as in the blocker-on process.
In other words, if an interrupt occurs between the process of turning off the blocker signal and the process of turning off the blocker status signal, one of them is turned off and the other is turned on. Interrupt processing is prohibited to update both values at once.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the addition of one stored sheet (MS_CREDIT_ADD) in step S262 of FIG.
In step S278, the stored number is read (S_CREDIT_READ). This process is the same as the process of FIG. In the next step S279, a process of adding “1” to the number of stored sheets (“+1”) is performed. This process is a process of updating the stored number data stored in the RWM 61. Then, in the next step S280, the stored number data is saved, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. In step S280, the value obtained by converting the stored number data into decimal number data is stored in the RWM 61.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the stored bet process (MS_BET_IN) in step S223 of FIG.
First, in step S281, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the medal limit flag is on (“1”). Here, the medal limit flag is a flag in which “1” is stored as data when the medal is bet up to a limit number (for example, three in the normal game). Then, the main control board 60 reads this data and determines whether or not the medal limit flag is on (“1”).

  In step S281, if the medal limit flag is on, it means that the maximum bet state has already been reached, and therefore the betting process according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, even if the operation of the bet switch 40 is detected in step S220 of FIG. 36 and the process proceeds to the “MS_BET_IN” process, if the maximum bet has already been made, the bet process is not performed.

When it is determined that the medal limit flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S284, and the medal limit number (for example, three in the normal game) is set. This process is the same as “MS_MMAX_SET” shown in FIG.
In the next step S285, a (bet) medal reading process is performed. This process is the same as the process (S_PLAYM_READ) shown in FIG. Next, the process proceeds to step S286, where the requested number of sheets is calculated.

This process is a process of subtracting the value read in the bet medal reading (step S285) from the value of the medal limit number set (step S284). For example, if three medals are set in the medal limit number set and it is determined that one bet has already been bet by reading the bet medals, this corresponds to a process of executing “3-1”.
Next, the process proceeds to step S287, and the requested bet number is corrected. This process is a process of setting the value calculated in step S286 as the requested bet number.

Next, the process proceeds to step S288, and the current number of stored sheets is read. This process is the same as the process (S_CREDIT_READ) shown in FIG.
In the next step S289, the main control board 60 determines whether or not medals are stored. When it is determined that no medal is stored, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that a medal is stored, the process proceeds to step S290.

In step S290, the rising data of the bet switch 40 signal is cleared. In this way, if there is a stored medal in step S289, the betting process is executed after clearing the rising data of the bet switch 40 signal.
As described above, the rising data of the input ports 0 to 2 is generated and stored by the interrupt process.
On the other hand, when executing the bet process, a process of clearing the rising data generated and stored by the interrupt process in the main loop is executed.

Here, if the rising data is not cleared, the rising data is maintained until the interrupt process is executed again. In this case, in the betting process of the main loop, the 1-bet process is executed again based on the rising data being “1”.
In order to avoid such inconvenience, the rising data is cleared before the betting process is started when medals are stored.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S292, and it is determined whether or not the number of medals stored (the number read in step S288) is equal to or greater than the requested bet number (the number set in step S286). When it is determined that the number of stored medals is equal to or greater than the requested number of bets, the process proceeds to step S294, and when it is determined that the number of stored medals is not equal to or greater than the requested number of bets, the process proceeds to step S293.

  In step S293, the medal storage number is set. This process is a process for betting the number of stored sheets. That is, when “No” is determined in step S292, the stored number is less than the bet number. In this case, a process of setting the stored number to the bet number is performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S294.

In step S294, an output request at the time of a storage bet is set. In step S295, the control command set 1 is executed.
In the next step S296, one medal addition (bet) process is performed (MS_MEDAL_INC: FIG. 32). Next, the process proceeds to step S297, and a process of subtracting one from the stored number is performed (MS_CREDIT_DEC: FIG. 42 described later). In the next step S298, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the requested number of bets has been completed. When it is determined that the process has been completed, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. When it is determined that the process has not been completed, the process returns to step S296. Thereby, when betting two or more sheets, the one-bed betting process (steps S296 and S297) is repeated.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing processing (MS_CREDIT_DEC) for subtracting one from the number of stored images in step S297 in FIG.
In step S301, the stored number is read (S_CREDIT_READ). This process is the same as the process of FIG. In the next step S302, a process of subtracting “1” from the stored number (“−1”) is performed. This process is a process of updating the stored number data stored in the RWM 61 as shown in FIG. In the next step S303, the stored number data is saved, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. In step S303, as in step S280, a value obtained by converting the stored number data into decimal number data is stored in the RWM 61.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the settlement process (MS_MEDAL_RET) in step S221 of FIG.
First, in step S311, the main control board 60 performs a stored number reading process (S_CREDIT_READ). This process is the same as the process of FIG. In the next step S312, the main control board 60 performs a (bet) medal reading process (S_PLAYM_READ). This process is the same as the process of FIG.

Next, proceeding to step S313, the main control board 60 checks the operating state flag. Subsequently, in step S314, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the game is in a replay operation (whether or not the replay operation state flag is on).
If it is not during the replay operation in step S314, the process proceeds to step S316. If it is during the replay operation, the process proceeds to step S315.

In step S315, the bet number that can be settled is cleared. This process is a process of setting the bet number read in step S312 to “0” during the replay operation.
Note that, as shown in this flowchart, even when the automatic bet is obtained by the replay operation, the stored medals can be settled while the automatic bet is maintained.

In the next step S316, the main control board 60 determines whether there are medals that can be settled. In this process, the stored (credit) number read in step S311 and the bet number read in step S312 are "ORed" to determine whether there are any medals that can be settled. Note that both the stored number read in step S311 and the bet number read in step S312 (or the bet number processed in step S315) are both stored in the register as described above. Here, in the case of the replay operation, since the bet medal number that can be settled in step S315 is set to “0” (clear), “Yes” is set only when there is a reserve number.
If it is determined in step S316 that there are medals that can be settled, the process proceeds to step S317 and subsequent steps. If it is determined that there are no medals that can be settled, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S317, a process of turning off the blocker 45 (MS_BLOCKER_OFF) is performed. This process is the same as the process of FIG. 39 described above.
Next, proceeding to step S318, the main CPU 62 sets an output request at the start of settlement, and executes the control command set 1 at the next step S319.
The processing of the next step S320 and step S321 is the same as the processing of step S313 and step S314 described above.

In step S321, when it is determined that the replay operation is being performed, the process proceeds to step S324, and when it is determined that the replay operation is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S322.
In step S322, a medal (the number of medals currently bet) is read (S_PLAYM_READ) (same as step S312).

Next, proceeding to step S323, the main control board 60 determines whether or not there is a bet medal. If it is determined that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S327 and subsequent steps. If it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S324 and subsequent steps.
Here, when there is a bet medal, the betting medal settlement process is performed by performing the processing from step S327 onward. On the other hand, when there is no bet medal, the process of step S324 and subsequent steps is performed to perform the settlement process for the stored medal, that is, the credited medal.
Therefore, when there are both bets and stored medals, the bet medals are settled first.

When the process proceeds from step S323 to step S324, the main control board 60 performs a process of lighting the settlement display LED 73c. In the present embodiment, the settlement display LED 73c is turned on while the stored medal settlement process is being performed.
In step S324, the same processing as in step S132 described above is performed. Specifically, this is a process of turning on the D4 bit (“1” when the checkout process is being performed) in the medal management flag stored in the RWM 61.

The process of actually turning on the settlement display LED 73c is performed as a process (specifically, step S640) in the LED display control (FIG. 49; IS_LED_OUT).
In order to actually turn on the settlement display LED 73c, a data signal (a signal for turning on the digit 5) is output from the D4 output terminal of the IC1, and a data signal (a signal for turning on the segment P) from the D7 output terminal of the IC2. ) Is output.

  In step S325, the stored medal settlement process (MS_CREDIT_RET) is performed (FIG. 44 described later). After the settlement process, the process proceeds to step S326, and the settlement display LED 73c turned on in step S324 is turned off. This process is the reverse of step S324, and is a process for turning off ("0") the D4 bit ("1" when the checkout process is in progress) in the medal management flag stored in the RWM 61. is there. Then, the process proceeds to step S336.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S323 that there is a bet medal and the process proceeds to step S327, the main control board 60 performs a payout process (MS_1MEDAL_PAY) for one medal (FIGS. 45 to 46 described later).

Next, proceeding to step S328, the main control board 60 executes a process of turning off any one of the LEDs (input display LEDs 73e to 73g) that display the input number.
For example, when three medals are bet at the present time, all three of the insertion display LEDs 73e to 73g are in a lighting state. Then, when the process proceeds to step S328 in this state, control is performed so that only the three-sheet insertion display LED 73g is turned off (the lighting of the one-sheet insertion display LED 73e and the two-sheet insertion display LED 73f is maintained).

When the process proceeds to step S328 in a state where the one-sheet insertion display LED 73e and the two-sheet insertion display LED 73f are lit, only the two-sheet insertion display LED 73f is turned off (the lighting of the one-sheet insertion display LED 73e is maintained). To control.
Further, when the process proceeds to step S328 in a state where only the single-loading display LED 73e is lit, control is performed so that the single-loading display LED 73e is turned off (thus, the insertion display LEDs 73e to 73g are all turned off). To do.

In step S328, similarly to steps S176 to S178 described above, processing for updating the stored input display LED signal data is performed. As described above, the input display LED signal data is determined according to the input number.
Insertion display LED signal data (when one sheet is inserted): 10000000
Insertion display LED signal data (when 2 sheets are inserted): 11 million
Loading display LED signal data (when 3 sheets are loaded): 11100000
It has become.
Therefore, immediately before step S328, when the insertion display LED signal data is “11100000” when three sheets are inserted, the calculation is performed to obtain “11000000” so as to be the insertion display LED signal data when two sheets are inserted. To do.
That is, by issuing an instruction to shift to the left, “11100000” → “11000000” (an instruction that is not a rotation type described above is used).

In the next step S329, a (bet) medal is read (S_PLAYM_READ; FIG. 33). In step S330, the medal number is subtracted. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the bet number data stored in the RWM 61.
In the next step S331, an output request for displaying the number of medals is set. This process is a request to display the number of medals after subtracting one medal. In the next step S332, the main control board 60 executes the control command set 1.
Further, in the next step S333, a (bet) medal is read (S_PLAYM_READ; FIG. 33). In step S333, the number of medals after subtraction of one is read.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S334, and the main control board 60 determines whether or not there is a bet medal as in step S323. If it is determined that there is a bet medal, the process returns to step S327, and a payout process for one medal is performed in the same manner as described above. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S335, and the main control board 60 performs a process of clearing the medal limit flag. Next, proceeding to step S336, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the end of payment. In the next step S337, the main control board 60 executes the control command set 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S338, and the process proceeds to a process of turning on the blocker 45 (MS_BLOCKER_ON; FIG. 31).

In the settlement process described above, in step S318 and step S319, control command data is set in order to transmit that the settlement has been started to the first sub-control board 80.
In step S336 and step S337, control command data is set in order to transmit to the first sub-control board 80 that the settlement has been completed.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the stored medal settlement process (MS_CREDIT_RET) in step S325 of FIG.
In FIG. 44, first, in step S341, the main CPU 62 performs a reading process (S_CREDIT_READ; FIG. 30) of the stored number at the present time. Next, the process proceeds to step S342, and the main control board 60 determines whether or not there is a stored medal, that is, a credit, based on the result read in step S341. When it is determined that there is a stored medal (zero flag is “0”), the process proceeds to step S343, and when it is determined that there is no stored medal (zero flag is “1”), the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

  In step S343, one medal payout process (MS_1MEDAL_PAY) (FIGS. 45 to 46 described later) is performed from the stored medals. In step S334, a process of subtracting one from the number of stored medals (MS_CREDIT_DEC; FIG. 42) is performed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S341. That is, in the stored medal settlement, processing is executed until the stored medal becomes “0”. At this time, it is designed so that it takes about 100 ms when it is controlled so that one medal is normally paid out by the processing of FIGS. 45 to 46 described later. In other words, when one medal is paid out, the stored number display data is updated at an interval of about 100 ms, and an interrupt process is executed during this time, so that the display of the stored number display LED 71 is subtracted one by one. Is configured to be visible.

45 and 46 are flowcharts showing the payout process (MS_1MEDAL_PAY) for one medal in step S327 in FIG. 43 (and step S343 in FIG. 44). FIG. 46 is a flowchart following FIG.
In step S351 in FIG. 45, the main control board 60 sets an error not detected. That is, a state in which no error is detected in the initial state is set. In the next step S352, the main control board 60 sets a medal jam error display request.
The medal clogging error is referred to as “HP error” in the present embodiment. When this medal clogging error occurs, “HP” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72 (digits 3 and 4). A predetermined register (for example, E register) is used to store the value of “DB” in a register (for example, D register) and to transmit a command (error number) for indicating “HP error” to the first sub-control board 80. ) Stores a value of “1”.

  In step S353, the main control board 60 determines whether an error has been detected. When it is determined that an error has been detected, the process proceeds to step S354, and an error display (MS_ERROR_DSP; FIG. 47 described later) is performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S355. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S353 that no error has been detected, the process proceeds to step S355.

  In step S355, the main control board 60 sets a control time (for example, 2686 interrupt, about 6000 ms) of the medal payout device. Here, the control time is started. In step S356, a process for driving the hopper motor 36 is performed. Specifically, by setting the above-described hopper motor drive signal data to “1”, the D7 bit of the output port 3 becomes “1” during the next interrupt processing. Next, proceeding to step S357, the main control board 60 reads the control time after setting in step S355.

In the next step S358, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the control time has passed a predetermined time. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S361, and when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S359.
In step S361, a process for turning off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is performed. Specifically, by setting the above-described hopper motor drive signal data to “0”, the D7 bit of the output port 3 becomes “0” during the next interrupt processing. In the next step S362, the detection time of the payout sensor 1 (for example, 27 interrupts, about 60 ms) is set, and the measurement of the detection time is started. In step S363, the main control board 60 determines whether data relating to the payout sensor 1 signal is ON. When it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S355, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S364.

In step S364, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the detection time of the payout sensor 1 has passed a predetermined time. When it is determined that the predetermined time has passed, that is, when the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is not ON and the detection time of the payout sensor 1 has passed the predetermined time, the medal has not been paid out. In step S365, the main control board 60 sets a medal empty error display request. The medal empty error is referred to as “HE error” in the present embodiment. When this medal empty error occurs, “HE” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72 (digits 3 and 4). The value of “DA” is stored in the D register), and a command (error number) for indicating “HE error” is transmitted to the first sub-control board 80. The value “2” is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step S353.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S364 that the detection time of the payout sensor 1 has not passed the predetermined time, the process returns to step S363.

  If it is determined in step S358 that the control time has not passed the predetermined time and the process proceeds to step S359, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is ON. When it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S360, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process returns to step S357.

In step S360, the detection time of the payout sensor 1 is set. This process is the same as step S362. Next, proceeding to step S366, the main control board 60 determines whether or not a medal jam has been detected. When it is determined that a clogged medal is detected, the process proceeds to step S352, and when it is determined that no medal is detected, the process proceeds to step S367.
In step S367, the main control board 60 determines whether the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is ON. When it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S368, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S357.

In step S368, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the payout sensors 1 and 2 is ON. When it is determined that both are on, the process proceeds to step S369, and when it is determined that both are not on, the process returns to step S366.
In step S369, the main control board 60 sets the detection time of the payout sensor 2. Next, proceeding to step S370 of FIG. 46, the main control board 60 determines whether or not a medal jam has been detected. When it is determined that a clogged medal is detected, the process proceeds to step S352, and when it is determined that no medal is detected, the process proceeds to step S371.

In step S371, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF. When it is determined that the data related to the payout sensor 2 signal is not OFF, the process returns to step S370, and when it is determined that the data is OFF, the process proceeds to step S372.
In step S372, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the medal payout is invalid. If it is determined to be invalid, the process proceeds to step S357. If it is determined not to be invalid, the process proceeds to step S373. In step S373, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF. When it is determined that it is off, the process proceeds to step S374, and when it is determined that it is not off, the process returns to step S370.

  In step S374, the remaining payout number (count value) is “−1” (“1” is subtracted). Next, proceeding to step S375, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the medal payout has been completed. When it is determined that the medal payout has been completed, the process proceeds to step S376, and when it is determined that the medal has not been completed, this flowchart is ended. In step S376, the main control board 60 performs a process for turning off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36. Specifically, by setting the above-described hopper motor drive signal data to “0”, the D7 bit of the output port 3 becomes “0” during the next interrupt processing. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing error display processing (MS_ERROR_DSP). The error display process of FIG. 47 is a process when a recoverable error occurs, and is restored by turning on the reset switch 53 or the like. The error when the processing of FIG. 47 is executed is an error that can be solved by a hall related person (administrator) of the slot machine 10 and is not likely to be a serious error. Therefore, processing such as interrupt prohibition is performed. Absent.
On the other hand, in the case of an “unrecoverable error” generated in step S24 in FIG. 20, the process of FIG. 47 is not performed. When an unrecoverable error occurs, the above-described processing of FIG. 25 is performed (interrupt is prohibited).

In FIG. 47, first, in step S381, the error number generated this time is stored. Specifically, the value of a predetermined register (for example, E register) before the occurrence of an error is stored in a predetermined area (error number data) of the RWM 61. Various errors are as follows.
CP error (error number “5”): illegal medal passing error in step S238 in FIG. 37 CE error (error number “4”): medal retention error C1 error in step S248 in FIG. 37 (error number “8”): FIG. 38 in step S249, the medal abnormal insertion error HP error (error number “1”): medal clogging error in step S352 in FIG. 45 HE error (error number “2”): medal empty error FE error in step S365 in FIG. Error number “9”): full error indicating that the sub tank 35b is full.
The recoverable errors are not limited to the errors mentioned in this embodiment, and there are other types, but the description is omitted in this embodiment.

In the next step S382, the states of the blocker (45) signal and the hopper motor (36) drive signal before the error occurs are saved (stored). Specifically, the blocker signal data and the hopper motor drive signal data (“0” or “1”) described above are stored in a predetermined register (for example, C register).
In step S383, the hopper motor (36) drive signal is turned off. Specifically, the hopper motor drive signal data is set to “0”. Thus, when the hopper motor 36 is being driven, the driving is stopped from the next interrupt process.

  In the next step S384, the blocker 45 is turned off (MS_BLOCKER_OFF; FIG. 39). In the next step S385, the acceptance permission flag of the start switch 41 is cleared. This process is the same as step S218 in FIG. 36, and is a process for turning off the D0 bit of the medal management flag.

Next, the process proceeds to step S386, and the display of the acquired number is saved. This process is for temporarily saving (storing) the number currently displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72 and displaying it again after removing the error factor. Specifically, the acquired number display data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 61 is stored in a predetermined register (for example, B register).
In the next step S387, processing for displaying error information on the acquisition number display LED 72 is performed. Specifically, the value of the D register stored before FIG. 47 is executed is stored. For example, if the stored error is a CP error in step S381, the value “CB” is stored in the acquired number display data in order to display “CP” on the acquired number display LED 72.
The segment display for the error information is performed by an interrupt process described later.

  In step S388, an output request at the start of error display is set, and in step S389, control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, “01” indicating the start of error display is stored in the D register, and error number data of the RWM 61 in which the error number is stored (“05” in the case of a CP error) is stored in the E register. . In steps S388 to S389, a control command (command to be transmitted to the first sub control means 80) for starting the error display is set.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S390, and it continues to detect whether or not the reset switch 53 has risen (operated). This process is performed by determining whether or not the rising signal of the D4 bit of the input port 1 is turned on. When it is determined that the reset switch 53 has risen, the process proceeds to step S391, and the rise data of the reset switch signal is cleared. In step S392, the full detection signal inspection data is set. This process is a process of setting inspection data for determining whether or not an error relating to the full sensor 38 has occurred (whether or not the sub tank 35b is full of medals).

Then, the process proceeds to the next step S393 to determine whether or not a full error has occurred. If it is determined that there is a full error, the process proceeds to step S397. If it is determined that there is no full error, the process proceeds to step S394.
In step S394, the inspection data of the payout sensors 37a and 37b are set. This process is a process of setting inspection data for determining whether or not an abnormality relating to the payout sensors 37a and 37b has been detected.

In step S395, it is determined whether the error is related to the payout sensors 37a and 37b. When it is determined that the error is related to the payout sensors 37a and 37b, the process proceeds to step S397. When it is determined that the error is not the error, the process proceeds to step S396.
In step S396, inspection data of the making sensors 44a and 44b and the passage sensor 43a are set. This process is a process of setting inspection data for determining whether or not there is an abnormality related to these sensors.

Then, the process proceeds to step S397, and an error check is performed based on the inspection data set in step S392, step S394, or step S396.
Next, proceeding to step S398, based on the error check result of step S397, it is determined whether or not the error factor has been removed. When it is determined that it has been removed, the process proceeds to step S399, and when it is determined that it has not been removed, the process returns to step S390. In step S399, the error number data stored in the RWM 61 in step S381 is cleared. In step S400, the acquired number saved in step S386 (temporarily stored in the B register) is returned to the acquired number display data, which is a predetermined storage area of the RWM 61. Therefore, the display content of the acquisition number display LED 72 is returned to before the occurrence of the error by the interrupt processing executed after the processing.

  In step S401, an output request at the end of error display is set, and in step S402, control command set 1 is executed. In steps S401 to S402, a control command (command to be transmitted to the first sub-control means 80) to end the error display is set.

  In the next step S403, a process for returning to the state before saving in step S382 is performed. Therefore, the state of the blocker (45) signal and the hopper motor (36) drive signal before the error occurrence stored in step S382 is read. Specifically, the process is restored based on the value of the predetermined register (for example, C register) saved in step S382. In step S404, the hopper motor drive signal data before the occurrence of the error is updated based on the value of a predetermined register (for example, C register). In the next step S405, based on the value of a predetermined register (for example, C register), it is determined whether or not the value of the blocker signal data before the occurrence of the error is “1”. When it is determined that the value is “1”, the process proceeds to step S406. When it is determined that the value is not “1”, the process according to the flowchart is terminated. In step S405, the blocker 45 is turned on (MS_BLOCKER_ON; FIG. 31), and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  As described above, in the error processing of FIG. 47, since the control command is transmitted to the first sub control board 80 at the start of error display and at the end of error display, the first sub control is performed while an error occurs. The board 80 (substantially the second sub-control board 90) can make a notification about the error that has occurred (a notification using the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23).

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing by the main control board 60 (main CPU 62). As described above, the main control board 60 performs the interrupt process shown in FIG. 48 at a period of 2.235 ms in parallel with the main loop of FIG.
First, when the process proceeds to the interrupt process in step S601, in step S602, as an initial process, a register value saving process and a duplicate interrupt prohibition process are performed. Here, since the register of the main CPU 62 used in the main loop is used for interrupt processing, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 61. Further, the interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that the next interrupt process is not started during the interrupt process. This is because, for example, an interrupt process execution request may be made during the power-off process.

In the next step S603, it is determined whether or not power-off is detected. Here, when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less by a voltage monitoring device (power supply interruption detection circuit) provided on the main control board 60 (not shown), the D0 bit of the input port 2 in FIG. Since the disconnection detection signal is input, it is detected whether or not the signal is input.
When power-off is detected, the process proceeds to power-off processing (IS_POWER_DOWN) in step S617. When it is determined that power-off is not detected, the process proceeds to step S604.

  In step S604, the control counter value is updated. For example, a counter that updates the value for each interrupt process is provided (for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed based on the number of interrupt processes), the counter value is updated.

In the next step S605, timer measurement is performed. This measurement is performed by measuring whether or not 4.1 seconds have elapsed from the start of the previous game to the start of the current game (wait process), or by a predetermined time of the input sensor 1 in the process of step S237 in FIG. It is measurement such as whether or not it has passed. In other words, a process of subtracting the time set in the main loop is executed.
Next, it progresses to step S606 and LED display control (IS_LED_OUT; FIG. 49 mentioned later) is performed. Here, according to the state of the slot machine 10, the set value, the stored number, the acquired number, the error display content (error code), etc. are turned on using the 7-segment LED (digits 1 to 5).

  As described above, in the non-recoverable error (SS_ERROR_STOP) shown in FIG. 25, an error display is output by the main process (step S68), but the setting value, the number of stored items, the number of acquired items, and the recovery possible during setting change or setting confirmation An error display is performed by this LED display control every time interrupt processing is performed.

In step S607, input ports 0 to 2 (FIG. 11) are read. As a result, whether or not the operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, etc. has been performed, the switch signals and the input signals of various sensors are read, and data (level data, rising edge) based on the input ports 0 to 2 are read. Data, falling data) is generated and stored in the RWM 61. In the next step S608, a built-in random number check process is performed. In the present embodiment, a flag that is turned on when an error occurs in the internal random number is provided, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.
Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random numbers for the lottery (for example, when the random number update is late), the error flag is turned on. More specifically, it is assumed that SCLK (oscillation source: 12 MHz) and RCK (oscillation source: 9 MHz) input to the MPU are provided, and the built-in random number is updated based on RCK. At this time, the error flag is turned on when “RCK <SCLK / 2” is satisfied.

  In step S609, it is determined whether an error has occurred in the built-in random number (whether the error flag is on). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S610. If it is determined that the error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S24 (FIG. 25) to shift to a non-recoverable error process (SS_ERROR_STOP). The error display content at this time is “E7”.

  In step S610, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed in units of 31 reels (left, middle, and right), and includes constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, deceleration start, and standby during stoppage and shaking fluctuation (described later) depending on the operation state. . When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process proceeds to step S611 to perform port output processing. In this process, the excitation output of the motor 32 (for reel) and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S612, a control command is transmitted (FIG. 51 described later). This process is a process for transmitting, for example, the control command set in the output request set and the control command set 1 (the untransmitted control command stored in the command buffer of the RWM 61) to the first sub control board 80.
Specifically, for example, when a control command is set in the command buffer in step S118 (output request set) and step S119 (control command set 1) in FIG. If it is empty, the control command is transmitted to the first sub-control board 80 in this step S612 in principle (interrupt process that comes next).

  In the next step S613, the data of the external signals 1 to 3 stored in the RWM 61 is stored in the register. This process is a process of reading on / off of each bit of the output port 6 (FIG. 13). In this embodiment, the external signal 1 data is an AT signal, the external signal 2 data is a sub bonus signal, and the external signal 3 data is a signal indicating an advantageous state (AT or sub bonus). In the next step S614, an external signal is output. As shown in FIG. 4, a signal is transmitted to the external concentration terminal board 100.

  In the next step S615, random number update processing is performed. In this process, when a random delay at the start of the rotation of the reel 31 is performed (when the pseudo game is ended and the normal game is started), the random number is updated, and a delay process based on the random value is performed for each reel 31. Run. The pseudo game and random delay will be described later.

  In the next step S616, the register value saved in step S602 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

As shown in the above processing, lighting / extinguishing of the storage number display LED 71, the acquisition number display LED 72, the status display LEDs 73 (73a to 73g), and the set value display LED 63 is controlled by interruption processing every 2.235 ms.
Furthermore, when an untransmitted control command is stored in the command buffer for each interrupt process, the transmission process is performed.

Note that as shown in step S61 in the non-recoverable error of FIG. 25, the interrupt process is not performed during the non-recoverable error processing.
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and processing based on abnormal data (data update of the RWM 61 based on data from the input port, transmission of a control command to the first sub control board 80), etc. In order to prevent execution of interrupts, interrupts themselves are prohibited.

In other words, at the time of an unrecoverable error, the control command is not transmitted from the main control board 60 to the first sub control board 80, so it is meaningless to execute the control command set 1.
Furthermore, if an untransmitted command is stored in the control command buffer when an unrecoverable error occurs, the command is not transmitted to the first sub-control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (IS_LED_OUT) in step S606 of FIG.
First, in step S621, the output ports 0 and 1 are turned off. As shown in FIG. 12, the output port 0 is an output port corresponding to a digit signal, and the output port 1 is an output port corresponding to a segment signal. By outputting “00000000” for these output ports 0 and 1, output of all LEDs is temporarily stopped. Thereby, when switching the display of the LEDs, it is possible to prevent the different LEDs from being turned on and viewed at the same time (to be displayed) (afterimage prevention).

In the next step S622, the LED display request counter is updated. As shown in FIG. 9, the update of the LED display request counter is a process of shifting a bit that is on, that is, “1” to the right by one digit. The updated value is stored in a predetermined storage area and B register of the RWM 61. Then, the process proceeds to step S623.
In step S623, it is determined whether the LED display request counter is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the LED display request counter updated in step S622 is “0”. When it is determined that it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S624, and when it is determined that it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S625.

  In step S624, the LED display request counter is initialized. Here, the initialization of the LED display request counter is set to “00010000” and stored in a predetermined storage area and B register of the RWM 61. Then, the process proceeds to step S625. Accordingly, when the LED display request counter is updated from “00000001” to “00000000” in step S622, it is determined to be “0” in step S623, and thus is updated to “00010000” in step S624. . That is, it is updated from “00000001” to “00100000” within one interrupt process.

In step S625, confirmation of the display request for the digit segments A to G to be displayed in the current interrupt processing is set.
In this process, first, the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the A register. As shown in FIG. 9, the LED display request flag is a flag in which digits that may be displayed are on (“1”) and digits that are not displayed are off (“0”).

Next, an AND operation (logical product) is performed on the value of the LED display request counter (B register value) and the value of the LED display request flag (A register value).
For example,
LED display request counter value: 00001000
LED display request flag value: 00001111
After AND operation: 00001000
It becomes.
Or, for example,
LED display request counter value: 00010000
LED display request flag value: 00001111
After AND operation: 00000000
It becomes.
If the result of the AND operation is “0”, the zero flag is “1”.

  In step S626, it is determined whether there is an LED display request. Here, it is determined whether or not the zero flag in step S625 is “1”. If “1”, it is determined that there is no display request, and the process proceeds to step S638. On the other hand, if it is not “1”, it is determined that there is a display request, and the process proceeds to step S627.

  In step S627, set value data is acquired. Here, the current set value stored in the RWM 61 is read and stored in the A register. In step S628, it is determined whether there is a setting value display request. This determination is made as to whether or not the D4 bit (digit 5) is “1” (“00010000”) as a result of the AND operation. If it is determined that there is a set value display request, the process proceeds to step S635. If it is determined that there is no set value display request, the process proceeds to step S629.

In step S629, the acquired number display data stored in the RWM 61 is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S630, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the lower digit of the acquired number of sheets, that is, whether or not there is a display request for digit 4. As a result of the AND operation, when the D3 bit (digit 4) is “1” (when it is “00001000”), it is determined that there is a display request, and otherwise, it is determined that there is no display request.
When it is determined that there is a display request for the lower digits of the acquired number, the process proceeds to step S635, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S631.

In step S631, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the upper digits of the acquired number, that is, whether or not there is a display request for digit 3. As a result of the AND operation, when the D2 bit is “1” (“00000100”), it is determined that there is a display request, and otherwise, it is determined that there is no display request.
When it is determined that there is a display request for the upper digits of the acquired number, the process proceeds to step S634, and when it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S632.

  Here, if it is determined in step S628 that there is no set value display request and it is determined in steps S630 and S631 that there is no acquired number display request, this means that there is a storage number display request. Therefore, when there is a request for displaying the number of stored sheets, the process proceeds to step S632, and the stored number of sheets is read (FIG. 30). Then, the read stored number data is stored in the A register.

  Next, proceeding to step S633, it is determined whether or not the display request at the time of the current interrupt processing is a display request for the lower digit (digit 2) of the stored number. If the result of the AND operation is that the D1 bit is “1” (“00000010”), it is determined that there is a lower digit display request, and the process proceeds to step S635. On the other hand, when the D1 bit is not “1”, the D0 bit must be “1”. That is, it can be determined that there is a display request for the upper digit (digit 1) of the stored number. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to step S634.

In step S634, the display data is corrected to display data of the upper digits of the stored number. Specifically, a process of exchanging upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits of the value stored in the A register is performed.
Specifically, when the storage number display data is “08”, that is, “0000/1000” (“/” is indicated between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits), “1000 / 0000 ". For example, when the number of stored sheets is “41”, that is, “0100/0001”, it is converted to “0001/0100”. Then, the process proceeds to step S635.

In step S635, an offset of the LED table is generated. Specifically, an AND operation (logical product) of the A register value and “00001111” is performed. This process is a process for acquiring segment data to be executed thereafter. Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register.
For example, when the A register value is “10000000”, it is “00000000”.
For example, when the A register value is “10101100”, “00001100” is obtained.
Furthermore, when the A register value is “00010100”, for example, “00000100”.
The A register value stored here becomes an offset value described later.

In step S636, the LED segment table is set. This process is a process for setting the address of the LED segment table stored in the ROM. The LED segment table is shown in FIG. 10, and the head address is “1211”.
In the next step S637, output data of segments A to G is acquired. Here, the segment data is obtained by adding the A register value (offset value) to the address of the LED segment table. Then, the acquired data is stored in the H register.

For example, when the A register value is “00000000”, the offset value is “0”. Therefore, the segment data at the address “1211”, that is, “00111111” is acquired and stored in the H register. As a result, the display content is “0”.
If the A register value is, for example, “00000100” (offset value is “4”), the segment data at the address “1215”, that is, “01100110” is acquired and stored in the H register. As a result, the display content is “4”.
Furthermore, when the A register value is, for example, “00001100” (offset value is “C”), the segment data at the address “121D”, that is, “00111001” is acquired and stored in the H register. As a result, the display content is “C”.

Next, the process proceeds to step S638, and it is determined whether there is a display request for the segment P. Here, the data stored in the above-described medal management flag is stored in the A register.
As mentioned above, the medal management flag
D0: “1” when the start switch 41 is operable.
D1: Not used D2: “1” when the blocker 45 is in an ON state (medal can be maintained)
D3: “1” during replay operation (medal automatically inserted)
D4: “1” when the account is being processed
D5: Not used D6: Setting change disable flag (“1” when setting change is disabled)
D7: Medal limit determination (“1” when the limit is the number of medals)
1 byte data consisting of

Then, an AND operation of the A register value storing the medal management flag data and the B register value storing the LED display request counter value is executed. If the result of the AND operation is “0”, it is determined that there is no segment P display request, and if it is not “0”, it is determined that there is a segment P display request.
For example,
A register value: 00001101
B register value: 00001000
After AND operation: 00001000 (A register)
And there is a display request.
For example, A register value: 00000101
B register value: 00001000
After AND operation: 00000000 (A register)
Thus, there is no display request.

If it is determined that there is a display request for segment P (the A register value after the AND operation is not “0”), the process proceeds to step S639. If it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S640.
In step S639, the output data of segment P is set. This processing is processing for setting the D7 bit of the H register (data stored in step S637), that is, the D7 bit of the digit for which display is requested in the current interrupt processing to “1”.

  By the above AND operation, for example, the LED that has a display request in the current interrupt processing (the digit that is “1” in the LED display request counter) is the digit 1, and the D7 bit corresponding to the segment P is “1”. ", The game start LED 73d is turned on as shown in FIG. That is, the digit 1 (the upper digit of the stored number display LED 71) and the game start LED 73d are turned on simultaneously.

Similarly, when the LED for which display is requested is the digit 3 in the current interrupt processing and the D7 bit corresponding to the segment P is “1”, the ON ready display LED 73b and the digit 3 are turned on simultaneously.
In addition, when the LED for which display is requested in the interrupt processing this time is the digit 4, and the D7 bit corresponding to the segment P becomes “1”, the replay display LED 73a and the digit 4 are turned on simultaneously.
Furthermore, when the LED requested to be displayed in the current interrupt processing is the digit 5, and the D7 bit corresponding to the segment P is “1”, the settlement display LED 73c and the digit 5 are turned on simultaneously.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when displaying the LEDs of the digits 1 to 5, it is sufficient that there are seven types of D0 to D6 bits corresponding to the segments A to G, but an 8-bit 1 Since the D7 bit is left when using byte data, the D7 bit is effectively used and used for lighting control of 73a to 73d in the state ideographic LEDs 73.

  In step S640, LED display data is output. Specifically, the B register value (which digit is turned on) is written to the output port 0 address, and the H register value (which segment is turned on) is written to the output port 1 address. As a result, the corresponding segment of the corresponding digit is turned on.

  As described above, in this embodiment, one digit is turned on by one interrupt process. That is, for each interrupt (every 2.235 ms), the LED to be lit is switched in the order of digit 5 → digit 4 →... → digit 1 → digit 5 →. Therefore, for example, after the upper digit of the storage number display LED 71 which is the digit 1 is turned on, the next turn is turned on after “11.18 ms” which is 5 interrupts later.

Here, the luminance of the LED is determined by the time interval of ms from the lighting time to the next lighting time. In this embodiment, as described above, one digit is controlled to light once every “11.18 ms”, but from the viewpoint of the player (human), the digits 1 to 4 are almost Since it seems to be always on, there is no problem.
On the other hand, in the case of an unrecoverable error, as described above, lighting switching between the upper digit and the lower digit is repeated every 0.128 ms. The brightness is higher than the brightness.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the power-off processing (IS_POWER_DOWN) when the power-off is detected in FIG. 48 and the process proceeds to step S617.
First, in step S651, the outputs of all output ports (0 to 6) are turned off. Next, proceeding to step S652, the power-off execution processing flag (see step S13 in FIG. 20) is stored in the RWM 61. This process is a process of storing in the RWM 61 data indicating that the power interruption interrupt process is being executed.

  In the next step S653, the control command read pointer is set to an even number (first time). As described above, when the control command is transmitted, the first control command and the second control command (two control commands) are transmitted. Further, as will be described later, the process of transmitting the first control command and the process of transmitting the second control command by one interrupt process are executed twice. However, there is a case where the power is cut off after transmitting the first control command and before transmitting the second control command. In this case, it transmits again from the first control command.

  Therefore, the process of step S653 sets the read pointer for designating the address of the buffer storing the control command to an even number in such a case. For example, when the reading pointer is “00011111”, it is set to “00011110”. If the number is even from the beginning, such as “00011110”, it is left as it is. By this process, the buffer of the designated address is always an even number, and the buffer storing the first control command is obtained. As a result, the control command can be reliably transmitted twice by simple program processing.

In the next step S654, checksum data of the RWM 61 is calculated. This process calculates a checksum including a work area (RWM 61) used in the program. Examples of the program use area to be processed include a program work area, an unused area, and a stack area.
In the next step S655, it is determined whether or not the calculation of the entire range of the checksum has been completed. If it is determined that the calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S654 and the calculation of the checksum is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined that the checksum calculation has been completed, the process proceeds to step S656.

  In step S656, the checksum of the RWM 61 is stored in the RWM 61. Here, the data stored in the RWM 61 is processed into a value (also referred to as complement data) that becomes data indicating “0” when the checksum of the RWM 61 is performed again. As a result, when executing the checksum of the RWM 61 at the start of the program, it is only necessary to determine whether the value of the RWM 61 is “0”, thereby simplifying the program processing and shortening the processing time. Leads to. Then, the process proceeds to step S657 to enter a reset waiting state. Here, when the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 60, so that the output of the reset signal is awaited. Here, when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, the voltage monitoring device inputs a power-off detection signal to the D0 bit of the input port 2 in FIG. 11, and then a predetermined time elapses by a circuit composed of a capacitor and a resistor. After that, the reset signal is input to the MPU. At this time, the capacitor and the resistance value are designed so that the processing time when the power is cut off is normally executed.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing control command transmission in step S612 of FIG.
First, in step S661, the address of the control command buffer is set. Control command data transmitted from the main control board 60 to the first sub control board 80 is stored in a buffer associated with the address in the RWM 61. Also, data indicating a read pointer for designating which address control command data is read is also stored in the RWM 61 in association with the address. Therefore, in step S661, the head address of the control command buffer and the address storing the read pointer stored in the RWM 61 are acquired.

In step S662, a read pointer is acquired. This process is a process for acquiring the current read pointer from the area in which the read pointer of the RWM 61 is stored.
In the next step S663, the address of the control command buffer to be transmitted is set. This process is a process for calculating the address of the control command buffer of the RWM 61 to be read next from the start address of the control command buffer and the read pointer.

  In step S664, it is determined whether or not a control command (to be transmitted) is included. If there is control command data at the address set in step S663, it is determined that there is a control command, and if the data at that address is “0”, it is determined that there is no control command. If it is determined that there is a control command, the process proceeds to step S665. If it is determined that there is no control command, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S665, an address is set in the SCU3 data register. In this embodiment, an SCU3 data register is used as a storage area for storing control command data for transmission, and the address of this register is set.
Next, proceeding to step S666, the first control command data is written to the address (SCU3 data register) set at step S665. As a result, the first control command data is transmitted to the first sub-control board 80. Further, the data of the address of the control command buffer to be transmitted is set to “+1”. Thereby, the address where the second control command data is stored is set.

Next, proceeding to step S677, as in step S666, the second control command data to be transmitted is written into the SCU3 data register. Accordingly, the second control command data is transmitted to the first sub control board 80.
In the next step S668, it is determined whether transmission of the control command is completed. Here, it is determined whether or not the read pointer data is an odd number. When it is an odd number, it indicates the second transmission, and when it is an even number, it indicates the first transmission.
In the present embodiment, such a process is performed in order to transmit the same control command (first control command and second control command) to the first sub-control board 80 twice in succession.

If it is determined in step S668 that a control command has been transmitted (read pointer data is an odd number), the process proceeds to step S669. If it is determined that no control command has been transmitted, the process proceeds to step S670.
In step S669, the transmitted control command data is cleared. That is, the data stored in the control command buffer is deleted, and the area of the RWM 61 is emptied.
In step S670, the read pointer data is updated by "+1". And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

  As described above, two bytes of the first control command data and the second control command data are transmitted in one interrupt, and the first control that is the same as the control command transmitted in the one interrupt is interrupted after the one interrupt. Two bytes of command data and second control command data are transmitted again.

  On the other hand, the sub-control board 80 that has received this control command data determines whether or not the control command received twice is the same, and if it is the same, stores one of the control commands and is not the same. At that time, the control command is not stored. Therefore, in the transmission of the control command data twice, when non-identical control command data is transmitted due to noise or the like, the first sub control board 80 does not execute the effect process based on the control command data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance based on the erroneous control command data.

When the control commands received twice are not the same and it can be determined that one of them is an error, the correct control command may be stored. For example, on the first sub control board 80 side, the type of control command transmitted from the main control board 60 is stored in advance, and when the received control command does not match any of the stored control commands, the correct control is performed. For example, it is determined that the command is not a command.
In addition, when the same control command is not received, a means for counting and storing the number of times may be provided. In this way, when collecting the slot machine 10, it can be used as a material for determining whether there has been an illegal act or the like based on how many times the control commands have become inconsistent.

Next, information processing on the first sub control board 80 side will be described. The processing of the first sub control board 80 described in the present embodiment is as follows.
Fig. 52; Program start processing and main loop processing Fig. 53; Power-off processing Fig. 54; Instantaneous interruption processing Fig. 55; Setting change start processing Fig. 56; Setting change end processing Fig. 57;

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a program start process and a main loop process of the first sub control board 80.
In FIG. 52, when the power is turned on in step S700 and the program of the first sub-control board 80 is started, first, in step S701, the first sub-control board 80 prohibits interrupt processing. In the next step S702, the first sub control board 80 executes various initialization processes. The initialization process includes initialization of the first sub CPU 82 and the RWM 81.

  Note that the RWM 81 to be initialized here is not an RWM (register) built in the first sub CPU 82, but is mounted on the first sub control board 80 and provided outside the MPU (first sub CPU 82). Refers to RWM. In the description of FIG. 52 and FIG. 53, the RWM 81 indicates this external RWM. Also, the initialization of the RWM 81 in step S702 means initialization of a range to be initialized by power-off (erasing of data to be erased by power-off).

In the next step S703, the first sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the checksums match. In this process, a checksum is calculated when the power is turned on and compared with the checksum stored in the RWM 81 when the power is turned off to determine whether or not they match.
If it is determined that the checksums match, the process proceeds to step S704. If it is determined that the checksums do not match, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S704, it is determined whether or not a power interruption has occurred during the main loop of the first sub-control board 80, that is, “1 command processing” in step S710 of FIG. When it is determined that a power interruption has occurred during the processing of one command (“Yes” in step S704), the processing according to this flowchart is terminated, and the program during the one command processing executed before the power interruption Return to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power is not cut off during one command processing, the process proceeds to step S706.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S703 to step S705, the RWM 81 is cleared. Here, clearing the RWM 81 means clearing data that has not been initialized in step S702. For example, the RWM 81 stores data that is erased (cleared) every time the power is turned off and data that is not erased only when the power is turned off. The data that is not erased only by turning off the power, for example, the number of games (the number of ceiling games) from the end of the AT until the next AT is activated, the sub game state managed on the first sub control board 80 side (the winning of the AT) Stages showing ease (high probability state, low probability state, etc.)), stage stages, and the like.

When the process proceeds from step S704 or step S705 to step S706, the main loop process of the first sub-control board 80 is started.
First, in step S706, the first sub-control board 80 clears the mounted watchdog timer. In step S707, the watchdog timer operation process (measurement) is started. The watchdog timer outputs a pulse for determining the runaway of the first sub CPU 82 and continues to count the number of outputs of this pulse. Then, as described later, when the count value (time value) of the number of pulses reaches a predetermined value (for example, “500 ms”) before the watchdog timer is cleared, it is determined that the first sub CPU 82 is running out of control. Then, the process of the first sub-control board 80 is shifted to the process when the power is turned on.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S708, and interrupt processing (which was prohibited in step S701) is permitted. If the interrupt process is permitted in step S708, an interrupt process shown in FIG. 58 described later is performed. In this interruption process, the production data, authentication data, and the like are transmitted to the second sub-control board 90.

  When interrupt processing is permitted during the main loop, the main loop is temporarily exited, and predetermined interrupt processing (FIG. 58) is executed. After executing the interrupt process, the process returns to the main loop again. This process is performed periodically. The interval of the interrupt time is 1 ms in this embodiment. That is, the process shown in FIG. 58 (process for transmitting a control command to the second sub-control board 90) described later is executed for each interrupt process at 1 ms intervals.

In the next step S709, processing is performed every 16 ms (processing per frame). The process executed by the first sub-control board 80 includes a process performed once every 16 ms (process every 16 ms or one frame process) and one command process performed within 16 ms. In step S709, the process is executed every 16 ms out of these processes.
Processing every 16 ms includes monitoring whether the image display device 23 (liquid crystal display) is operating normally, monitoring whether the sound source amplifier of the speaker 22 is operating normally, measuring the power-on time, 2 Processing to store control commands to be transmitted to the sub control board 90 in the command buffer, generation of level data and rising data based on the operation of the push button 83 and the cross key 84, update of random numbers used for AT lottery, error time, Measurement of the drive time of the reel 31 is executed.

Next, proceeding to step S710, one command processing (processing for one instruction) is executed. Examples of the one command processing include AT lottery, sub-state transition lottery, production lottery, creation of a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control board 90, and the like.
Further, when commands of different systems (for example, a first system command and a second system command) are received as one command process, the one command process is executed for each command.

For example, as a first system command, a command (such as a command showing a lottery result, an error number command, a setting change start command, etc.) necessary for smoothly progressing the game, and as a second system command, a game Commands that do not directly affect the progress of the command (commands in which the start switch 41 is operated when the role lottery is not performed, commands for which the stop switch 42 is operated in the case where the stop control of the reel 31 is not performed, and the like are input to input ports) Information).
In such a case, in the one command processing, the command processing is executed in a series of order such as the first system command → the second system command.

If a power interruption occurs during the processing of one command, complete recovery processing is performed. In the complete recovery process, the process returns from the timing when the power interruption occurred during the processing of one command.
On the other hand, when power interruption occurs other than during one command processing, normal return processing is performed. In the normal return process, the first sub CPU 82 and the RWM 81 are initialized, and the process is executed from the beginning of the main loop.
As a result, in the complete recovery process, the first sub CPU 82 and the RWM 81 are not initialized. The AT lottery process or the like can be executed based on the correct control command data.

After execution of the one command process, the process proceeds to step S711, and it is determined whether 16 ms has elapsed. In this embodiment, whether or not 16 ms has elapsed is provided by providing a counter that increments “+1” for each interrupt process (every 1 ms), and determining whether or not the counter value has reached “+16”. .
If it is determined that 16 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S710 to continue the one-command processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S711 that 16 ms has elapsed, the counter value for counting 16 ms is reset, the process returns to step S706, and the watchdog timer started in step S707 is cleared. Therefore, at this time, the number of pulses (time) of the watchdog timer that has been counted is cleared.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the watchdog timer is cleared every 16 ms, but when it is not cleared for a certain time (for example, 500 ms), a watchdog timer interrupt process is generated and the process returns to step S701. Control.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the power-off process in the first sub-control board 80. This process is executed when the first sub-control board 80 detects power-off. In this embodiment, the power interruption is detected every interrupt process (every 1 ms).
In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, power is supplied to the main control board 60 and the first sub control board 80, respectively, and when the power is cut off, the first sub control board 80 is main. It is configured to detect later than the control board 60. For example, the first sub-control board 80 performs a power recovery process when an 8V voltage is supplied, and the main control board 60 performs a power recovery process when a 9V voltage is supplied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of control commands transmitted from the main control board 60.

  In FIG. 53, when the power-off is detected, the process proceeds to step S721, and the first sub-control board 80 stops the watchdog timer. In the next step S722, it is determined whether or not program processing is being performed. When the power-off is detected, it is determined whether the program start process or the main loop process in FIG. 52 is in progress. If it is determined that the program start process is being performed, the process proceeds to step S725. If it is determined that the program is being processed, the process proceeds to step S723.

  In step S723, a checksum is calculated. Then, in the next step S724, various data is saved in the RWM 81. Here, examples of the various data include programs that have been executed as a result of calculating the checksum.

When the process proceeds from step S722 or step S724 to step S725, it is determined whether or not 500 ms has elapsed since the power-off was detected. When it is determined that 500 ms has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S726, and when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S726, it is determined whether power has been restored. When it is determined that it has returned, the process proceeds to step S727 to shift to instantaneous interruption processing, and when it is determined that it has not returned, the process returns to step S725.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the instantaneous interruption processing in step S727 in FIG. When the instantaneous interruption processing is started, the number of instantaneous occurrences is updated in step S741. The number of instantaneous occurrences is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 81. Then, the process proceeds to step S742, and the watchdog timer stopped in step S721 is started (including not only starting timing from the stopped time but also starting timing from the beginning). And it returns to the program which detected the power-off.
Although not shown in the flowchart, the number of occurrences of power interruption is also stored. As a result, the number of occurrences of power interruption and the number of occurrences of instantaneous interruption can be stored, so that it is possible to know what behavior has occurred in the slot machine 10 at the time of collection of the slot machine 10, etc. This can be one of the grounds for determining whether or not an action has been performed.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing setting change start processing in the first sub-control board 80. When the setting value change is started on the main control board 60, in the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of FIG. 21, the output request at the start of the setting change is set in step S37, and the control command set 1 is set in the next step S38. Executed.

  Then, in the interrupt process (FIG. 48) by the main control board 60, the control command indicating that the setting change has been started is transmitted in the control command transmission (FIG. 51) in step S612. When this control command is received, it is determined that the change of the setting value is started on the main control board 60 side. In response to this, the process of FIG. 55 is started.

The first sub-control board 80 has higher priority than the above-described 1 ms interrupt process and other interrupt processes (NMI may be used) in order to prevent the control command from the main control board 60 from being missed. Then, the control command reception process is executed, and the received control commands are sequentially stored in the RWM 81 (which may be a circuit in the chip) having a predetermined storage area of the first sub-control board 80.
This storage area is a storage area that is not erased even in the setting change process. Thus, even when a control command is transmitted from the main control board 60 when the first sub control board 80 is initialized, processing based on the command is normally executed.

The setting change start process is a process performed in step S710 (one command process) in FIG. The same applies to the setting change end processing described later.
In FIG. 55, when the setting change process is started in step S750, the interrupt process is prohibited in step S751. Here, the “interrupt” indicates a 1 ms interrupt when a control command is transmitted from the first sub control board 80 to the second sub control board 90. Interruption of control commands (every 2.235 ms) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the first sub control board 80 is not prohibited. Also, the control command reception process does not prohibit interrupts in order to prevent the control command from being missed.

The 1 ms interrupt from the first sub control board 80 to the second sub control board 90 is prohibited because the information stored in the RWM 81 is updated before the initialization of the RWM 81 to be executed thereafter is completed. This is to prevent unintended control processing from being executed.
For example, as a first example, if command A is stored in the command buffer for transmission from the first sub-control board 80 to the second sub-control board 90, if a 1 ms interrupt is executed during initialization, the command A may be transmitted. Then, there is a possibility that the second sub-control means 90 will execute an effect based on the received command A. This command A is to be cleared based on the initialization process (setting change process) (stored in the area of the RWM 81 to be cleared). Therefore, during initialization, by disabling interrupt processing, the command buffer is surely initialized before interrupt processing is executed, and unintended command transmission and control processing as described above are executed. Is prevented.

  As a second example, the input port of the push button 83 is detected by a 1 ms interrupt, the detection result is stored in the RWM 81, and the push button 83 is turned on for all 16 interrupts (the number of loops). When detected, it is possible to consider a specification that determines that the push button 83 is operated in a process every 16 ms (one frame process; step S709). In this case, if a 1 ms interrupt is executed during initialization, the data in the storage area of the RWM 81 related to the input of the push button 83 may be updated. That is, although the data of the RWM 81 is being initialized, there is a possibility that the data is updated to new data according to the operation of the push button 83. Thus, during the initialization, the interrupt processing is prohibited, so that the data update in the storage area of the RWM 81 can be eliminated.

In the next step S752, the first sub control board 80 stops the watchdog timer. This process is to prevent the watchdog timer clear process from being executed during the initialization process of the RWM 81 to be executed later. In other words, if it is determined as a runaway, the initialization process is interrupted.
Next, proceeding to step S753, the first sub-control board 80 designates an address for starting initialization of the RWM 81. Here, the range of addresses to be initialized is specified. Next, the process proceeds to step S754, and initialization processing for the range is executed.

In step S755, it is determined whether the initialization process of the RWM 81 is completed. When it is determined that the initialization process has not been completed, the initialization process is continued. When it is determined that the initialization process has been completed, the process proceeds to step S756. When it is determined that the initialization process has not been completed, Returning to step S754, the initialization process is continued.
In step S756, the stop of the watchdog timer stopped in step S752 is released. The cancellation of the stop is considered to be the case where the timing is started from the middle when the watchdog timer is stopped, and the case where the timing is started from the initial value, not the time when the watchdog timer is stopped. .
In the next step S757, the interrupt prohibited in step S751 is permitted. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

As described above, when the first sub control board 80 receives a setting change start control command from the main control board 60, the first sub control board 80 performs initialization of the predetermined range of the RWM 81 on the first sub control board 80 side. .
In the above process, since the watchdog timer is stopped and then the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RWM 81, the restart process by the watchdog timer can be prevented from being executed during the initialization process.
In the present embodiment, at the time of the setting change start process, the watchdog timer is stopped in step S752. However, instead of this, a process of clearing the watchdog timer may be performed.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the setting change end process. When the change of the set value is completed in the main control board 60, in the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in FIG. 21, the output request at the end of the setting change is set in step S49, and the control command set 1 is executed in the next step S50. The When the first sub control board 80 receives this control command, the main control board 60 determines that the setting value has been changed.

  First, when the setting change end process is started in step S760, in step S761, based on the new setting value, the sub gaming state (as described above, the stage indicating the ease of winning the AT (high probability state, normal (The probability state, the low probability state, etc.) are determined by lottery, and the information on the set value is included in the control command data transmitted at the end of the setting change.In the next step S762, the first sub control board 80 The number of ceiling games (the number of games until the above-described AT is activated) is determined by lottery, and in the next step S763, the effect stage is an effect notified by the image display device 23 and the like, and the ease of winning an AT is determined. The selection rate varies depending on the stage shown), and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, when the setting change process is started, the predetermined range of the RWM 81 is initialized, and the sub game state, the number of ceiling games, and the effect stage are cleared. When the setting change end process is started, these are again determined by lottery and stored in the RWM 81.
The number of ceiling games may be determined based on the sub game state determined before that. Alternatively, a specific number of ceiling games may be set uniformly.
Also, the effect stage may be determined based on the sub game state determined before, or may be determined independently without being based on the sub game state. Or you may set to a specific production stage uniformly.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing processing when the RWM 81 is abnormal in the first sub-control board 80. The process of FIG. 57 is executed before executing the main loop process in FIG. The processing of FIG. 57 is executed when removal of RWM 81 (including ROM) is detected, or when data of RWM 81 is different from that before power-off processing (for example, when checksum data is different from that before power-off). ) And the like.

When the abnormality processing of the RWM 81 is started in step S770, an address to be initialized of the RWM 81 is set in step S771. In step S772, initialization processing is executed.
In the next step S773, it is determined whether or not the initialization is completed. If it is determined that the process has not been completed, the initialization process is continued. If it is determined that the process has been completed, the process proceeds to step S774. Note that the processes in steps S771 to S773 are the same as the processes in steps S753 to S755 described above.

When it is determined in step S773 that the initialization process has been completed, the process proceeds to step S774, and the first sub control board 80 sets the sub game state, the number of ceiling games, and the effect stage.
As described above, when the normal setting change process is completed, as shown in FIG. 56, the sub gaming state and the like are determined by lottery or the like. However, when the RWM 81 in FIG. Set etc.

  Then, the sub gaming state, the number of ceiling games, and the production stage set here are set to the most unfavorable conditions for the player. For example, as the sub gaming state, the stage that is most difficult to win the AT is set, the maximum number of games is set as the number of ceiling games, and the stage having the lowest AT winning expectation is selected as the stage. As described above, the process for setting the initial state is referred to as “cold start” or the like, and when an illegal operation such as removal of the RWM 81 is considered, the most unfavorable condition regarding the AT is set.

  The MPU and the external RWM 81 of the first sub control board 80 are designed so that the power supply voltage is supplied even when the power is cut off. More specifically, power is stored on the first sub-control board 80 (which may be another board) by a storage battery (capacitor, button battery) to supply a power supply voltage for holding data of the RWM 81. ing. In other words, once the RWM 81 is removed, the data stored in the RWM 81 is no longer retained, and information such as information that was normally turned off when the RWM 81 was attached is also erased. Designed to be executed.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the interrupt process when the interrupt is permitted in step S708 in FIG. When interruption is permitted in step S708, the processing shown in FIG. 58 is executed every 1 ms. The interrupt process is a process of transmitting control command data from the first sub-control board 80 to the second sub-control board 90.
The control command transmitted from the first sub-control board 80 to the second sub-control board 90 is generally related to production output, but also includes authentication data and checksum data.

In particular, in this embodiment, data is transmitted in units of one packet, and checksum data is included in a command for one packet. The second sub control board 90 can determine that data for one packet has been transmitted from the first sub control board 80 by receiving the checksum data.
On the other hand, the second sub-control board 90 transmits the checksum and the received command data number (or the number of bytes) to the first sub-control board 80. By receiving this data, the first sub-control board 80 can determine whether or not there is a communication failure (so-called command ghost).

When the first sub-control board 80 determines that there has been a command error, or when there is no reply from the second sub-control board 90 for a predetermined time, the data for one packet again (same as the previous transmission). Data) is transmitted (retry processing).
Here, in this embodiment, the retry process is set up to three times. When it is determined that the retry process of the same data exceeds three times at the start of the retry process, it is determined as abnormal, and the process of initializing the second sub control board 90 is executed without executing the retry process. .

  In this embodiment, in order to prevent the RWM 81 from being illegal, at least a part of the program and data stored in the RWM 81 is also stored in the RWM 91 (sharing of programs and data). Then, the authentication data for judging the consistency of the shared program and data is transmitted from the first sub-control board 80 to the second sub-control board 90 by the interrupt process. When receiving the authentication data, the second sub-control board 90 determines consistency with the data stored in the RWM 91 and returns a checksum to the first sub-control board 80.

  When it is determined that the authentication data matches, no special processing is performed, but when it is determined that the authentication data does not match, error notification or the like is executed. In the determination of the consistency of authentication data, an error may be generated when it is determined that there is a mismatch. Alternatively, after determining the consistency of the entire range, an error may be generated when there is authentication data that does not match.

  In FIG. 58, when the interrupt process is started in step S800, in step S801, the first sub control board 80 transmits a control command (including the authentication data described above; the same applies hereinafter) to the second sub control board 90. Check the status to do. Then, according to the state of the first sub-control board 80, the process proceeds to a predetermined step. In the present embodiment, there are an idle state (also called a standby state), a data transmission start waiting state, a data transmission in progress, a reply waiting state, a recovery start state, and a recovery waiting state.

  If it is in the idle state, the process proceeds to step S802. If it is in the data transmission start waiting state, the process proceeds to step S811. If the data is being transmitted, the data continues to be transmitted. When it is in the reply waiting state, the process proceeds to step S821, when it is in the recovery start state, the process proceeds to step S831, and when it is in the recovery waiting state, the process proceeds to step S841.

  In the idle state, when proceeding to step S802, the first sub-control board 80 determines whether or not it has an untransmitted control command. If it is determined that there is an untransmitted command, the process proceeds to step S803, and if it is determined that there is no untransmitted command, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. In step S803, in order to register an untransmitted command, the read pointer of the buffer in which the untransmitted command is stored is updated. In step S804, a transmission request for the 0th byte is made in the control command to be transmitted. In this process, by determining the 0th byte of the control command, it is determined whether or not transmission data is written in a TDR (Transmit Data Register; 1-byte register in this embodiment; the same applies hereinafter) described later. Because.

  In step S805, it is determined whether the TDR is empty (empty), that is, whether transmission data is written (stored). If it is determined that the TDR is empty, the process advances to step S806 to write data to be transmitted to the TDR (write process). Then, the process proceeds to step S807, interrupt permission for emptying transmission data is performed, and this flowchart is ended.

  When data is written in the TDR, the data is normally transmitted automatically, and after transmission, the TDR data is automatically emptied (empty). On the other hand, when the second sub control board 90 is not ready for reception (initial setting is not completed), the data written in the TDR remains untransmitted, and therefore there is data in the TDR. (Waiting for data transmission start). Meanwhile, the second sub-control board 90 performs an image output such as “image is being restored” to indicate that the command related to the image cannot be received, so that the hall personnel can grasp the current state. Can do. Further, even when an unintended power interruption occurs during the game, the player can grasp the current situation by performing the same image output. In addition, by controlling so that commands related to voice can be received first, for example, even when a power failure occurs during AT, the order of operations can be mistaken by navigating the order of pressing by voice during “restoring the image” You can also advance the game without.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S805 that the data is not TDR empty, the data to be transmitted is already written in the TDR. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S808, and the data transmission start waiting state is updated. That is, after the process according to this flowchart is completed, in the next interrupt process, when “Yes” is determined in step S801, the process proceeds to step S811.

  If it is determined in step S801 that it is in a data transmission start waiting state, the process proceeds to step S811, and similarly to step S805 described above, it is determined whether the TDR is empty. If it is determined in step S811 that the TDR is not empty (data to be transmitted has already been written), the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the TDR is empty, the process proceeds to step S812, and writing (write processing) to the TDR is performed as in step S806. Next, the process proceeds to step S813, and interrupt permission for emptying data to be transmitted is performed as in step S807. In step S814, the command transmission state is updated during data transmission. That is, at the time of the next interrupt processing, if “Yes” is determined in step S801, “data transmission is in progress”.

If it is determined in step S801 that the reply is waiting, the process proceeds to step S821.
Here, after transmitting a control command to the second sub-control board 90 and transmitting a control command for one packet (maximum 15-byte data in this embodiment), the transmission is temporarily interrupted and the second sub-control board 90 It shifts to the reply waiting state from 90.
When the first sub-control board 80 transmits a control command, the first sub-control board 80 starts timing by a timer. In step S821, the first sub-control board 80 continues to determine whether or not the time measured by the timer has passed a predetermined waiting time. When it is determined that the predetermined waiting time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S823, and retry processing, that is, retransmission of the control command is performed. When the process proceeds to the retry process in step S823, the process proceeds to step S851 in FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S821 that the predetermined waiting time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S822 to determine whether a checksum error has occurred. Here, the checksum error corresponds to a case where the checksum is received and the received checksum is not a correct value. If the checksum has not been received yet, the checksum error in step S822 does not occur. If it is determined in step S822 that a checksum error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S823, and the process proceeds to a retry process. If it is determined that there is no checksum error, the process according to this flowchart ends.

  In the example of the flowchart of FIG. 58, the first sub control board 80 determines whether or not a checksum error has occurred based on the checksum returned from the second sub control board 90. It is also possible to determine a checksum error on the sub control board 90 side.

For example, when receiving the checksum, the second sub-control board 90 may determine whether the check is correct by comparing with the checksum calculated on the second sub-control board 90 side. In this case, when the second sub-control board 90 determines that the checksum is normal, the second sub-control board 90 does not reply to the first sub-control board 80, and when it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, A reply (indicating that the checksum is abnormal) may be sent to the first sub-control board 80.
When the first sub control board 80 receives information indicating that the checksum is abnormal, it determines that the checksum is abnormal.

When the process proceeds to the retry process in step S823, it is determined in step S851 whether or not the number of retries (including the first transmission) is 3 or less. In this embodiment, when the number of retries exceeds “3”, it is determined that there is an abnormality.
Here, the first sub-control board 80 counts the number of retries using a counter, and determines whether or not the number of retries is “3” or less. If it is determined that the number of retries is “3” or less, the process advances to step S852 to shift to a recovery start state. Thereby, at the time of the next interruption process, when “Yes” is obtained in step S801, the processes after step S831 are performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S851 that the number of retries is not “3” or less, the process proceeds to step S853, where the first sub control board 80 determines that the transmitted data is abnormal, and the second sub An initialization request is made to the control board 90. Then, the process proceeds to step S854 to shift to the idle state. As a result, at the time of the next interrupt process, if “Yes” is determined in step S801, the processes after step S802 are performed.

  If it is determined in step S801 that the recovery has started, the process proceeds to step S831. In step S831, it is determined whether the TDR is empty. When it is determined that the TDR is not empty (data to be transmitted is written), the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the TDR is empty, the process proceeds to step S832, the recovery waiting time (50 ms) is set, and the timer starts counting. In the next step S833, data writing (write processing) to the TDR is performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S834 and shifts to a recovery waiting state. As a result, at the time of the next interrupt process, if “Yes” is determined in step S801, the processes after step S841 are performed.

  If it is determined in step S801 that the state is waiting for recovery, the process proceeds to step S841. In step S841, it is determined whether a predetermined waiting time (the above 50 ms) has elapsed. When it is determined that the waiting time has not elapsed, the recovery waiting process is terminated, and when it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S842. In step S842, registered data to be transmitted is set. In the next step S843, a transmission request for the 0th byte of the data set in step S842 is made. Then, the process proceeds to step S844 to shift to a data transmission start waiting state. Thereby, at the time of the next interruption process, when it becomes "Yes" at step S801, the process after step S811 is performed.

Next, the image display contents of the image display device 23 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the system menu (store manager mode of the store (hall) where the slot machine 10 is installed) will be described.
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing image display contents of the image display device 23 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.
As described above, when the setting change is started, the control command for starting the setting change is transmitted from the main control board 60 to the first sub-control board 80 (FIG. 21; steps S37 to S38).

Similarly, at the start of setting confirmation, a control command for starting setting confirmation is transmitted from the main control board 60 to the first sub-control board 80 (FIG. 35; steps S413 to S414).
In response to this, the first sub-control board 80 also sends a control command to the second sub-control board 90 indicating that the setting is being changed or that the setting is being confirmed. Thereby, it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed also on the second sub-control board 90 side.

When the second sub control board 90 receives the control command indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the second sub control board 90 displays an image of the system menu shown in FIG. In FIG. 59, “setting change” is displayed during setting change, and “setting confirmation” is displayed during setting confirmation.
As described above, the display of the acquisition number display LED 72 is “-” while the setting is being changed, and the display of the acquisition number display LED 72 is “00” while the setting is being confirmed.
Further, the frame lamp 21 is lit in a predetermined pattern so as to correspond to the setting change or setting confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 59, “volume adjustment mode”, “game standby lamp color selection mode”, and “side lamp test mode” are provided as the contents of the system menu. Further, an error occurrence history, setting change history, and current time are displayed. The display content is not limited to that shown in FIG.
Further, the current time to be displayed can be set by a store clerk on the hall side using the cross key 84 or the push button 83 during the setting change. Furthermore, the current time may be set in the same way during the setting confirmation.

For determining the current time, the system clock of the first sub CPU 82 owned by the first sub control board 80 is used.
When an error (including both an unrecoverable error and a recoverable error) occurs in the slot machine 10, the date and time at the time of occurrence are stored in the RWM 81, and the display data is displayed in the system menu display. The image is transmitted to the second sub-control board 90 and displayed on the image display device 23. Note that only the occurrence of recoverable errors that can be grasped by the first sub-control board 80 may be stored, and the occurrence history may be displayed only for the recoverable errors.

  Furthermore, the system menu displays a setting change history. In step S49 of FIG. 21, when the output request set and the control command 1 at the end of the setting change are executed, the control command is transmitted to the first sub-control board 80. The first sub control board 80 stores the time (setting change history) at which this control command is received in the RWM 81, and displays the setting change history when the system menu is displayed. Of course, information for which the set value has been confirmed may be stored and displayed in the same manner. In addition, a list including the error occurrence history and the setting change history may be displayed. As a result, the store clerk on the hall side can grasp what behavior the slot machine 10 has, and lead to early detection when there is an illegal act.

The current time, error occurrence history, and setting change history data may be stored in the RWM 91 of the second sub-control board 90.
In addition, even when the current time, error occurrence history, and setting change history are stored in any of the RWM 81 and the RWM 91, the stored contents are retained even after the power is turned off using a backup battery. Further, not only when the power is turned off, but also when the setting is changed or when the reset switch 53 is operated, the time, error occurrence history, and setting change history data are not erased.
As shown in FIG. 55, when the setting change is started, the RWM 81 is initialized. However, when data related to the above time, error occurrence history, and setting change history is stored in the RWM 81, in the process of step S754 Will not be erased.

  When the cross key 84 is used in the system menu of FIG. 59, the cursor can be placed in any one of “volume adjustment mode”, “game standby lamp color selection mode”, or “side lamp test mode”. Then, when the push button 83 is turned on in the mode in which the cursor is positioned, control is performed so as to shift to that mode.

In FIG. 59, when the cursor is positioned in the “volume adjustment mode” using the cross key 84 and the push button 83 is turned on, the volume adjustment mode is entered.
FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an image display device 23 displays an image of the tone adjustment mode. A plurality of levels (seven levels in the example of FIG. 60) are provided as the volume that can be output from the speaker 22 of the slot machine 10, and the cursor is placed at a desired volume using the cross key 84. When the push button 83 is turned on at that position, the sound volume is fixed and the system menu of FIG. 59 is restored. When the volume is set, the second sub-control board 90 controls the amplifier IC (not shown) of the speaker 22 and sets the resistance value corresponding to the volume.

In FIG. 59, when the cursor is positioned in the “game standby lamp color selection mode” using the cross key 84 and the push button 83 is turned on, the game standby lamp color selection mode is entered.
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example in which an image display device 23 displays an image in the game standby lamp color selection mode.

  Here, the “game standby lamp color selection mode” means that, during game standby, in particular, it is determined that there has been no operation for a predetermined time (eg, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, etc.) since the player's last operation was performed. The slot machine 10 shifts to a demonstration pattern. In the demonstration pattern, for example, the appearance character or the like is displayed on the image display device 23, or the frame lamp 21 is controlled to light up in a predetermined pattern.

Here, it is the “game standby lamp color selection mode” that determines the pattern in which the frame lamp 21 is lit during the demonstration. In this embodiment, 15 types are prepared. When a pattern is selected with the cross key 84 and the push button 83 is turned on, the pattern is fixed and the system menu is displayed.
When any pattern is selected by the cross key 84, the frame lamp 21 is controlled to be lit (sampled display) according to the pattern.

When the push button 83 is turned on in a state where any pattern is selected, the pattern is confirmed and the system menu screen is displayed again.
The patterns 1 to 15 are stored in the RWM 91 (or ROM) of the second sub control board 90. Then, the pattern selected in the game standby lamp color selection mode is stored, and when the mode is shifted to the demonstration mode, the selected pattern is read, and the lighting of the frame lamp 21 is controlled according to the pattern.

In FIG. 59, when the cursor is positioned in the “frame lamp test mode” using the cross key 84 and the push button 83 is turned on, the frame lamp test mode is entered.
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example in which an image display device 23 displays an image in the frame lamp test mode. In the frame lamp test mode, as shown in FIG. 1, when some trouble occurs in the frame lamp 21 (upper lamp and side lamp) provided on the front cover of the slot machine 10 and a lighting failure occurs, etc. This is a test mode for checking the lighting state. In this embodiment, 15 types are prepared, and when a pattern is selected with the cross key 84, the frame lamp 21 is turned on with the pattern. When the push button 83 is turned on, the test pattern (lighting) ends and the system menu is displayed. With this test mode, it is possible to determine a defective LED, a color that cannot be lit, or the like.

Similar to the “game standby lamp color selection mode” patterns 1 to 15, the “frame lamp test mode” patterns 1 to 15 are stored in the RWM 91 (or ROM) of the second sub-control board 90. When any pattern is selected in the frame lamp test mode, the selected pattern is read, and lighting of the frame lamp 21 is controlled according to the pattern.
Further, when the setting change is completed or the setting confirmation is completed while the system menu screen is displayed, control is performed so that the screen returns to the game-ready state screen.

As mentioned above, although one Embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, For example, the following various deformation | transformation are possible.
(1) In this embodiment, a special replay is won at the start of an AT game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. (A symbol combination that is easy for the player to start) may be displayed.
Here, the main game and the pseudo game will be described.
The “main game” is the original function of the operation switch (the bet switch 40 is a function for inserting a medal to start the game, the start switch 41 is a function for starting the rotation of the reel 31 to start the game, stop The switch 42 is a game in which the function of stopping the rotating reel 31 within the range of the maximum number of moving frames based on the lottery result of the winning combination is effective as a game to obtain a game result. Point to.

  In this game, when the bet switch 40 is operated, medals are inserted, when the start switch 41 is operated, the reel 31 starts rotating (and the lottery is performed), and the stop switch 42 is operated. Sometimes, the reel 31 is stopped based on the winning lottery result, and the game result in the game is displayed by the combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped.

  On the other hand, during the freeze, no medals are inserted even if the bet switch 40 is operated, the rotation of the reel 31 does not start even if the start switch 41 is operated, and the reel 31 is operated even if the stop switch 42 is operated. The fact that the game result is not displayed (the reel 31 does not stop) or the like is a state in which the function of the operation switch is not effective for obtaining the game result in the game by proceeding with the game.

  The “pseudo game” is a game that is executed during the freeze. Unlike the main game, the function of at least one operation switch is to advance the main game and obtain a game result. Refers to games that are not valid. In particular, from the time when the start switch 41 is operated until the reel 31 becomes a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted (until the function of the stop switch 42 becomes effective for obtaining a game result). During this period, a pseudo game is executed.

  The timing of execution of the pseudo game is the next game after the end of the precursor. The next game is notified that a combination of symbols to be stopped in the pseudo game, for example, “Red 7” is targeted. In addition, when making “Red 7” assortment in a pseudo game, the “Red 7” assortment may not be set as a combination of symbols of a role.

When it is decided to execute the freeze and the pseudo game, the freeze and the pseudo game are started before the start of the main game in the next game.
When the player operates the start switch 41, a combination of lotteries is performed and a pseudo game is started. On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is operated, the rotation of the reel 31 is started. When the reel 31 is rotated by operating the start switch 41 and the game is executed before the main game in the game, the rotation of the reel 31 by the operation of the start switch 41 is simulated. It becomes a game.

Also, in the pseudo game, when the player operates the stop switch 42, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is changed to change the display state of the symbol different from the stop for displaying the game result. Control is performed so that a display state of a combination of symbols that does not indicate a result (a state close to the stop of the reel 31) is obtained. That is, although the function of the stop switch 42 is not effective for displaying the game result, the reel 31 is changed by the operation of the stop switch 42 as an opportunity.
At this time, the above-described AT operation symbol is displayed with the operation of the stop switch 42 as an opportunity, thereby producing an effect at the start of AT. Also, when the AT operation symbol is displayed, an outer end signal is transmitted.

  In addition, when displaying an AT operation symbol in response to an operation of the stop switch 42 during a pseudo game, the AT operation symbol is a stop control using a stop position determination table in this game (the maximum number of smooth frames is four). However, the reel 31 may always display the AT operation pattern on the effective line regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (even when the maximum number of sliding frames exceeds 4 frames). May be controlled. This is because the pseudo game is not limited by the maximum number of sliding frames in the game.

Further, it is assumed that the display state of the symbol during the pseudo game is accompanied by fluctuation of the swing without the reel 31 (the symbol) completely staying at a certain position.
Here, “fluctuation fluctuation” means that a symbol repeats moving up and down with a constant amplitude (swing width). For example, the operation is such that after moving at a close position for a predetermined time, moving downward and holding at that position for a predetermined time, moving upward again and stopping for a predetermined time.

More specifically, it stays at that position for 390 ms from the time the symbol is displayed, moves to the upper position, stays at that position for 10 ms, then moves to the lower position and stays at that position for 10 ms, etc. For example, there is a pattern of repeating 390 ms at first, then moving and staying for 10 ms.
The reason for setting the first staying time to 390 ms is to distinguish it from the stop for displaying the game result by setting the staying time to less than 500 ms.

  “Stopping the reel 31” means displaying a game result. Then, once the game result is displayed, the reel 31 displaying the game result cannot be changed again within the same game. Therefore, if the reel 31 is stopped during the pseudo game, then the reel 31 cannot be stopped and the game result cannot be displayed in this game.

Therefore, during the pseudo game, with the operation of the stop switch 42 as a trigger, the display state of the symbol accompanied by fluctuations in a state close to the stop of the reel 31 (temporary temporary stop, pseudo stop) is set. That is, the display state of the symbol during the pseudo game is not a stop indicating the game result. In other words, even if the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 does not stop so as to show the game result in the game.
For this reason, the display state of the symbol during the pseudo game does not mean that the symbol combination corresponding to the combination has stopped on the active line, that is, the combination winning combination. Therefore, medals are not paid out as in the small role winning, and medals are not automatically inserted as in the replay winning.

  In this way, in the pseudo game, after all the reels 31 are set to the symbol display state, the player waits for the start switch 41 to be operated, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the pseudo game and freeze are performed. And all the reels 31 are changed again. Note that the operation of the start switch 41 at this time is an operation in a state where the function of the start switch 41 is not effective for obtaining a game result, and the player ends the pseudo game by himself (freezing is performed). (Cancel or cancel) operation. Further, the re-change of the reel 31 is controlled so that the rotation start timing of the re-change varies for each reel 31 by a random delay.

  As described above, if the AT operation symbol is displayed using the pseudo game, the AT operation symbol is displayed in the next game after the end of the precursor and the game (the main game after the pseudo game is ended) is displayed. AT can be started. As a result, there is no provision for AT preparation (a game for notifying the correct pushing order when a composite bell is won), and accordingly, the appearance rate (base) before AT can be lowered.

  (2) The above freeze is also used as a production weight. For example, as in the above-described embodiment, when the special replay ("red 7" set) is won and AT starts, the main control board at the time of addition during AT (a combination of specific symbols is stopped) Freezing can be executed at the end of AT when performing AT management on the 60 side. Further, since the control command related to the freeze is transmitted from the main control board 60 to the first sub control board 80, the first sub control means 80 displays the effect corresponding to the freeze when receiving this control command. can do.

Freezing as described above is common to weight processing in that the game (information processing on the main control board 60 side) does not proceed. However, the weight processing as freeze is for the purpose of presentation (showing to the player).
On the other hand, for example, the wait process in step S40 of FIG. 21 is a process for waiting for the end of the information processing when it takes time for the information process, and is essentially different from the wait process as a freeze. .

  (3) In the above embodiment, the AT has a specification in which the number of basic games is, for example, “50” and is added to “50”. However, the specification is not limited to this, and the specification may be such that the AT is continued for a predetermined number of times until the continuation condition is not satisfied. In this case, the continuation rate is determined by lottery at the time of AT winning, AT operation symbol (special replay) winning or the like. Then, the continuous lottery is executed at a predetermined timing, and when the continuous lottery is won, the next set of ATs (predetermined number of games) is executed.

  (4) AT management (AT lottery, start, execution, end, etc.) may be performed on the main control board 60 side. If the AT is managed on the main control board 60 side, it is determined that the AT is being operated when the stop switch 42 is operated in the three consecutive correct push order when the composite bell is won, or the incorrect push order in the three consecutive cases. Thus, it is not necessary to determine that the AT has ended when the stop switch 42 is operated, and the game at the start or end of the AT can be accurately determined.

  (5) For the LED display request flag, the D4 bit (digit 5) is set to “1” only during setting change and setting confirmation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is controlled so that the digit 5 (setting value display LED 63) is lit on the condition that the D4 bit is set to “1” including the normal state and the setting key switch 52 is detected to be on. Also good.

(6) In the present embodiment, the error number is displayed by the acquisition number display LED 72, but instead, it may be displayed by the storage number display LED 71.
Further, while the setting is being changed, the storage number display LED 71 is not displayed and “-” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72, but the same display as during the setting confirmation may be performed.
Furthermore, any of the digits 1 to 4 may be used as the set value display LED without providing the set value display LED 63 (digit 5). For example, when the acquired number display LED 72 is also used as the set value display LED, when the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the digit 3 is turned off and the digit 4 is turned on and the set value is displayed.

Furthermore, when the set value display LED 63 is provided, it is not limited to being mounted on the main control board 60 shown in the present embodiment, and may be on another board.
For example, first, as described above, when the display substrate 70 is arranged on the back side of the display window 13, the setting value is displayed on the display substrate 70 when the front cover 11 is opened. A value display LED 63 may be attached.
Second, the set value display LED 63 may be mounted on a board on which the setting key switch 52 and the setting change / reset switch 53 are mounted (a board adjacent to the right side of the main control board 60 in FIG. 3).
Thirdly, although not shown in the present embodiment, when a board (connected to the main control board 60) for relaying the start switch 41 and the stop switch 42 is arranged on the back side of the front cover 11 In addition, a set value display LED 63 may be mounted on the substrate so that the display of the set value can be seen when the front cover 11 is opened.

(7) It is also possible to execute a myslo game using the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment.
Here, “Myslo game” has the following contents.
The slot machine 10 stores a player's game history (number of games, number of AT wins, etc.). At the end of the game, the slot machine 10 displays the game history on the image display device 23 as a two-dimensional code.

  The player reads the two-dimensional code with the player's own portable communication terminal (such as a smartphone equipped with a CCD capable of reading the two-dimensional code) and accesses a server computer operated by the manufacturer of the slot machine 10 or the like. The server computer stores the latest game history of the player. Further, the server computer issues a password to the mobile communication terminal held by the player. The player can take over the game history by entering the password at the start of the game and starting the game.

In such a myslo game, the game history is stored in the RWM 81. When the RWM 81 is simply initialized when the power is turned on / off (step S701), there are a case where the game history is set to be erased and a case where the game history is set not to be erased.
Also, at the time of initialization when setting change is started (step S754), the game history is deleted.

For example, if the game history is deleted when the power is turned on, the behavior when the setting change is started is the same as when the setting change is started. It is possible not to inform the player of this.
In addition, if the game history is uniformly erased when the power is turned off, the player will be disadvantaged if an unintended power cut occurs during the game. Therefore, the time is counted from the time when the power is turned off, and if a predetermined time (for example, 2 hours) has elapsed, the game history is erased when the power is turned on, and if the predetermined time has not elapsed, the game history is retained when the power is turned on. It may be.

The game history is not limited to the above-described myslo game, and for example, the number of executions related to the game displayed on the image display device 23 (the number of normal games, the number of AT games, the number of games indicating the chance zone) is controlled in the same manner. Can be.
For example, control is performed so that the display of the number of executions related to these games is not performed when the power is turned on from power off, but the number of games from the power off to power on may be held internally. As a result, a difference occurs between the apparent ceiling and the internal ceiling, which can be an element of guessing whether or not the setting has been changed by proceeding with the game.

  (8) In this embodiment, the setting door that covers the setting change / reset switch 53 is provided, and the opening / closing of the setting door is detected by detecting the on / off of the setting door switch 54. However, the setting door is not necessarily provided. When the setting door (setting door switch 54) is not provided, the signal of the setting door switch 54 is not included in the determination of the “designated switch” in step S18.

(9) Although the set value display LED 63 is composed of 7 segments, for example, “.” (Dots) may be provided in addition to 7 segments, such as “6.”.
In this case, in order to turn on / off the dots of the set value display LED 63, for example, the unused segment P signal of the digit 2 can be assigned. A method is conceivable in which the dots are turned on at the start of setting change, and the dots are turned off when the set value is determined and confirmed by turning on the start switch 41.
Furthermore, during the setting confirmation, the dot is turned off to distinguish it from the setting change.

(10) In FIG. 59, it is possible to change the information to be displayed and the modes that can be changed between setting change and setting confirmation. Furthermore, the mode that cannot be changed may not be displayed from the beginning.
For example, while the setting is being changed, all the contents displayed in FIG. 59 are displayed as an image, while during the setting confirmation, the error occurrence history is not displayed and the volume adjustment mode is not displayed.

  (11) As shown in FIG. 26, when it is determined that there is a bet medal in step S104, the process proceeds to step S106, and the process of step S105 is not performed. In this embodiment, setting confirmation can be performed in step S105, and therefore setting confirmation cannot be performed when a bet medal is present. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and setting confirmation may be possible even when a bet medal is present. Further, after the start switch 41 is operated (after step S108), the setting confirmation cannot be performed until all the reels 31 are stopped (at the end of the game), but the setting confirmation may be performed during this time.

(12) In this embodiment, control is performed so as to start the settlement process based on the rising data related to the settlement switch 46. That is, the settlement process is started by operating the settlement switch 46.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the settlement process may be started by operating the settlement switch 46 for a certain period of time (holding it down).
For example, the settlement process is started when the level data related to the settlement switch 46 is continuously on for 500 interrupts (≈about 1100 ms).

(13) In the present embodiment, a game state transition combination such as 1BB or RB (a so-called bonus combination that carries over the winning) is not provided, but it is of course possible to provide these.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the internal winning game is created by carrying over the MB win, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an internal winning game may be created by winning 1BB or RB.

  (14) The digit lighting time is 2.235 ms, which is the interrupt time, but the interrupt cycle is not limited to 2.235 ms. For example, various times such as 1 ms which is an interrupt processing cycle from the first sub-control board 80 to the second sub-control board 90 can be cited. When the digit lighting time is set to one interrupt time, the lighting time of one digit depends on the interrupt time.

(15) In this embodiment, the upper digit / lower digit switching time of the unrecoverable error is set to 0.128 ms, but is not limited to this time. In this embodiment, the time of 0.128 ms is measured by subtraction of the B register, but the wait time may be counted by other methods.
(16) In this embodiment, the LED display request counter is set to a different value depending on whether it is normal, during setting change, or during setting confirmation. However, other than this, a state that takes a specific value may be provided. For example, when the operation switch is not operated for 30 to 60 seconds after the game ends, the game shifts to the game standby state, the value of the LED display request flag in this game standby state is set to “00000000”, and all digits are turned off. May be set.

(17) When a power interruption occurs during output of a continuous effect (a series of effects over a plurality of games), the effect during the continuous effect may be deleted when the power of the first sub control board 80 is restored.
For example, in the case of continuous production between four games (A → B → C → D (AT winning result notification)), if power interruption occurs after the production B is output, the production after the production C is not output. .
However, the presence or absence of output may be determined according to the effect D (AT winning result). For example, when the effect D is AT winning notification, the effect C and the effect D (AT winning notification) are output after the power is restored. On the other hand, when the effect D is AT non-winning notification, the effects C and D are not output after the power is restored. For example, when the output of AT winning notification (effect D) is set to a mission in Myslo game, it is preferable to set as above for the player.
In the case where the effect D is AT non-winning notification, the effect is output when the output of the effect is set to the mission of Myslo game, and the effect is output when it is not set to the mission of Myslo game. It is also possible to set so as not to output.

(18) In the present embodiment, the first sub-control board 80 and the second sub-control board 90 are provided. However, the first sub-control board 90 and the second sub-control board 90 may be configured. In this case, the push button 83, the cross key 84, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 are connected to the sub control board.
The second sub control board 90 can be a board specialized for image control. In this case, the push button 83, the cross key 84, the effect lamp 21, and the speaker 22 are connected to the first sub control board 80, and the image display device 23 is connected to the second sub control board 90.

  (19) In the flowchart shown in the present embodiment, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the figure. When the order of processing can be changed, the order of processing can be changed. .

(20) In the present embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of a gaming machine, but a control command is transmitted from the main control board 60 (main control means) to the sub control boards 80 and 90 (sub control means). The above can also be applied to a ball game machine, an enclosed game machine, and the like.
(21) The present embodiment and the various modifications described above are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combination.

<Appendix>
The specification and drawings at the beginning of the filing of this application have at least two inventions, one of which is the claimed invention. The invention according to the claims at the beginning of the filing of the present application is initially referred to as the first invention, and the other invention is initially referred to as the second invention.
Problems to be solved by the invention according to the initial claims of the present application (initially first invention), means for solving the problems related to the first invention, and the effects of the first invention are as follows. .
(A1) Problems to be solved by the first invention at the beginning In the technique of Patent Document 1, the indicator to be lit can be switched by turning on / off the changeover switch 100 (setting key switch). It is not a dynamic lighting control of a plurality of 7-segments by automatic control. Further, in the payout number display 50, the tenth display 51 is always lit, so even if the first display 52 and the set value display 60 are switched on by the changeover switch 100, the entire display is displayed. It will not light up dynamically.

  The first problem to be solved by the first invention is to enable dynamic lighting when a gaming machine such as a slot machine has a display unit for displaying a set value and a display unit for displaying information about the game. It is.

(B1) Means for Solving the Problem According to the First Invention (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The first solution is
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
A display unit (digits 1 to 5) controlled by the main control means,
The main control means determines means (setting key switch 52, setting change / reset switch 53) from among a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) having different advantages to the player. , Setting value display LED 63, setting changing means 62a, setting change processing program (M_RANK_SET)),
The display unit includes a first display unit (set value display LED 63) for displaying the set value, and a second display unit (reserved number display LED 71, acquired number display LED 72) for displaying information on the game,
Provided with a display request flag (LED display request flag) that defines the display unit that can be turned on,
The main control means includes
While changing the set value, the value of the display request flag is determined (set to “00011100”) so that the first display unit is turned on and at least one of the second display units is turned off.
After the change of the set value, the value of the display request flag is updated so that the first display unit is turned off and the second display unit turned off during the change of the set value is turned on (“ Update to "00001111"),
A display request counter (LED display request counter) is provided for each interrupt process, and determines the display unit to be lit in the current interrupt process.
The display unit is lit on the condition that the display unit can be turned on by the display request flag and the display request counter determines that the display unit is turned on in the current interruption process.

The second solving means is the first solving means,
The second display unit includes a plurality of display units that display one digit on the one display unit and can display one piece of information including a plurality of digits.
The main control means, when displaying information consisting of a plurality of digits on the second display unit, turns on the display unit of one digit in the interrupt processing, and the other one digit in the interrupt processing from the next time on. By turning on the display unit, a plurality of digits of the second display unit are displayed by a plurality of interruption processes.

(Function)
Initially, in the first invention, the main control means executes interrupt processing. As the interrupt process, a control command is transmitted from the main control unit to the sub-control unit.
Then, for each interrupt process, the display unit is turned on under the condition that it can be turned on by the display request flag and that the display request counter determines that the display unit is turned on in the current interrupt process.
Here, the display request flag is a flag whose value changes in accordance with the gaming state, such as during normal operation, during setting change, or during setting confirmation.
In contrast, the display request counter is a flag that turns on one digit (or turns off all digits) for each interrupt process.
Then, the display unit in which both the display request flag and the display request counter are turned on, for example, the display unit that is “1” as a result of AND operation of both data is turned on.
Thereby, the 1st display part and the 2nd display part can be lighted dynamically.

In the embodiment, since the LED display request flag of the set value display LED 63 serving as the first display unit is “0” during normal operation, it is not lit.
While the setting is being changed, the set value display LED 63 as the first display unit and the LED display request flag of the acquired number display LED 72 as one of the second display units are set to “1”, and these are subjected to dynamic lighting control. The On the other hand, during the setting change, the LED display request flag of the storage number display LED 71 which is another one of the second display section is “0” and does not light up.
Furthermore, during the setting confirmation, the setting value display LED 63 that is the first display unit, the acquisition number display LED 72 that is one of the second display units, and the storage number display LED 71 that is the other one of the second display units. All of the LED display request flags are “1”, and these are subjected to dynamic lighting control.

(C1) Effects of the First First Invention According to the first first invention, a plurality of first display units and second display units are processed by using a period of interrupt processing which is one of information processing executed by a gaming machine. It is possible to perform dynamic lighting control for lighting with.

In addition, when dynamic lighting of a plurality of display units (7-segment, etc.), various settings are possible for setting the lighting time (switching speed) of each display unit (each digit).
Here, although it depends on the current flowing through the display unit (LED or the like), when the lighting time of one display unit becomes longer, the flickers of the plurality of display units increase (the overall luminance decreases).
In the present embodiment, five digits (7 segments) are provided, and the digit is lit (can be lit) once every five interrupts (11.18 ms).
When set in this way, it is not necessary to provide a specific counter or the like by matching the dynamic lighting cycle with the interrupt processing cycle, and dynamic lighting that does not hinder a decrease in luminance or the like can be realized.

Further, the problem to be solved by the initial second invention, the means for solving the problem related to the initial second invention, and the effects of the initial second invention are as follows.
(A2) Problems to be solved by the second invention initially In the conventional technology, in recent years, the storage capacity on the sub-control means side has increased due to diversification of effects. For this reason, a difference in size occurs between the storage area initialized on the main control means side and the storage area initialized on the sub-control means side. Therefore, while the initialization is completed relatively early on the main control means side, a certain amount of time is required for initialization on the sub control means side.

  Here, when the main control unit side initializes a predetermined storage area at the start of setting change and shifts to the next control process, the sub control unit side may still be initializing. However, in the current No. 5 machine (actual machine), the communication between the main control means and the sub-control means is one-way from the main control means to the sub-control means because of the specification. It is not known whether initialization has been completed on the means side.

In this case, the initialization end at the time of setting change in the sub-control means is delayed from the end of initialization at the time of setting change in the main control means. When the main control unit finishes initialization and proceeds with the control process, the sub control unit does not complete initialization, and therefore synchronization occurs in the progress of the control process between the main control unit and the sub control unit. There is a problem that it may not be able to be removed.
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the second invention at first is that even if the initialization end at the time of setting change in the sub-control means is delayed from the initialization end at the time of setting change in the main control means, the control processing of both is performed. Is to synchronize.

(B2) Means for solving the problem according to the second invention at first (note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The second invention was originally
Main control means (main control board 60) for controlling the progress of the game;
Sub-control means (first sub-control board 80) that receives a command from the main control means and controls the production,
The main control means includes
Setting value changing means (setting value display LED 63, which enables execution of changing processing of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) having different degrees of advantage to the player based on operation information of a specific switch (setting key switch 52) Setting change means 62a, setting change processing program (M_RANK_SET)),
Storage means (buffer of RWM 61) for storing a command to be transmitted to the sub-control means;
Command transmitting means for transmitting the command stored in the storage means,
When the setting value changing unit starts the setting value changing process, the setting value changing unit stores a setting value changing process start command in the storage unit (the output request set at the start of setting change in step S37 and the control in step S38). Command set 1),
After a predetermined wait time has elapsed after being stored in the storage means (step S39 and step S40), a setting value can be selected based on operation information of a predetermined switch (setting change switch 53),
The sub-control unit is configured to execute predetermined data initialization processing based on reception of a setting value change processing start command from the command transmission unit.

(Function)
Initially, in the second invention, when starting the setting change, the main control means stores the setting value changing process start command to be transmitted to the sub-control means in the buffer, and then executes the wait process. Here, when a start command for setting value change processing is stored in the buffer, the command is immediately transmitted to the sub-control means.
Then, when receiving this command, the sub control means executes an initialization process. As a result, while the initialization process is being executed by the sub-control means, the main control means can wait for the initialization process to be completed by the sub-control means by the wait process.

(C2) Effect of Initially Second Invention According to the initial second invention, while the initialization process is executed by the sub-control means, the main control means finishes the initialization process by the sub-control means by the wait process. Can wait. As a result, it is possible to avoid the progress of the processing after initialization by the main control means even though the sub control means is still being initialized. Therefore, even when the end of initialization at the time of setting change in the sub-control means is delayed from the end of initialization at the time of setting change in the main control means, both control processes can be synchronized.

10 Slot machines (gaming machines)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 11 Front cover 12 Base | substrate part 13 Display window 14 Discharge port 15 Medal tray 16 Door switch 21 Production lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display apparatus 31 Reel 32 Motor 35 Medal payout apparatus 35a Hopper 35b Sub tank 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Discharge sensor 38 Full sensor 39 reel sensor 40 bet switch 41 start switch 42 stop switch 43 medal slot 43a passage sensor 44a, 44b insertion sensor 45 blocker 46 settlement switch 50 power supply unit 51 power switch 52 setting key switch 53 setting change / reset switch 54 setting door switch 60 Main control board (main control means)
61 RWM
62 Main CPU
62a Setting change means 62b Role lottery means 62c Reel control means 62d Prize determination means 62e Payout means 62f Command control means 63 Set value display LED
70 Display board 71 Storage number display LED
72 Acquisition number display LED
73 Status display LED
73a Replay display LED
73b LED indicating that it can be inserted
73c Checkout LED
73d Game start LED
73e Single-load indicator LED
73f Two-sheet loading display LED
73g Three-sheet loading indicator LED
80 First sub-control board (sub-control means, first sub-control means)
81 RWM
82 First sub CPU
82a AT control means 82b Command control means 83 Push button 84 Cross key 90 Second sub control board (sub control means, second sub control means)
91 RWM
92 Second sub CPU
92a Command control means 92b Output control means 100 External concentration terminal board

Claims (2)

Main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
A display unit controlled by the main control means,
The main control means includes means for determining any one setting value from a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player,
The display unit includes a first display unit that displays the set value, and a second display unit that displays information about the game,
Provided with a display request flag that determines the display unit that can be turned on,
The main control means includes
During the change of the set value, the value of the display request flag is determined so that the first display unit is turned on and at least one of the second display units is turned off.
After the change of the set value, the display request flag value is updated so that the first display unit is turned off and the second display unit turned off during the change of the set value is turned on.
A display request counter that determines the display unit that is updated every interrupt processing and is lit in the current interrupt processing,
The display unit is turned on under the condition that the display unit can be turned on by the display request flag and the display unit is determined to be turned on by the display request counter in the current interrupt processing. Machine. In claim 1,
The second display unit includes a plurality of display units that display one digit on the one display unit and can display one piece of information including a plurality of digits.
The main control means, when displaying information consisting of a plurality of digits on the second display unit, turns on the display unit of one digit in the interrupt processing, and the other one digit in the interrupt processing from the next time on. By turning on the display unit, a plurality of digits of the second display unit are displayed by a plurality of interruption processes.

Images